Correct @section placement for makeinfo 4.13
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946@kindex -t
947@kindex --trace
948@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 949@item -t
252b5132 950@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 951Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
952
953@kindex -T @var{script}
954@kindex --script=@var{script}
955@cindex script files
956@item -T @var{scriptfile}
957@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
958Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 959@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 960@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
961output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
962the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
963specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
964options accumulate.
252b5132 965
14be8564
L
966@kindex -dT @var{script}
967@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
968@cindex script files
969@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
970@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
971Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
972
973This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
974processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
975command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
976@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
977behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
978command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
979the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
980@samp{gcc}).
981
252b5132
RH
982@kindex -u @var{symbol}
983@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
984@cindex undefined symbol
985@item -u @var{symbol}
986@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
987Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
988symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
989modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
990different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
991option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
992
0a618243
AB
993If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
994into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
995undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
996instead.
997
998@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
999@cindex symbols, require defined
1000@cindex defined symbol
1001@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1002Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1003is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1004is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1005and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1006@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1007can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1008
252b5132
RH
1009@kindex -Ur
1010@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1011@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1012For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1013@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1014turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1015@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1016It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1017with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1018be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1019@samp{-r} for the others.
1020
c005eb9e
AB
1021@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1022@cindex orphan sections
1023@cindex sections, orphan
1024@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1025Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1026specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1027
1028@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1029
1030@table @code
1031@item place
1032Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1033the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1034@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1035
1036@item discard
1037All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1038@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1039
1040@item warn
1041The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1042issue a warning.
1043
1044@item error
1045The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1046@end table
1047
1048The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1049
577a0623
AM
1050@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1051@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1052Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1053@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1054missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1055specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1056multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1057input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1058in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1059
252b5132
RH
1060@kindex -v
1061@kindex -V
1062@kindex --version
1063@cindex version
1064@item -v
1065@itemx --version
1066@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1067Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1068lists the supported emulations.
1069
1070@kindex -x
1071@kindex --discard-all
1072@cindex deleting local symbols
1073@item -x
1074@itemx --discard-all
1075Delete all local symbols.
1076
1077@kindex -X
1078@kindex --discard-locals
1079@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1080@item -X
252b5132 1081@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1082Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1083system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1084or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1085
1086@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1087@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1088@cindex symbol tracing
1089@item -y @var{symbol}
1090@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1091Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1092option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1093to prepend an underscore.
1094
1095This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1096don't know where the reference is coming from.
1097
1098@kindex -Y @var{path}
1099@item -Y @var{path}
1100Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1101for Solaris compatibility.
1102
1103@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1104@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1105The recognized keywords are:
1106@table @samp
1107
1108@item combreloc
1109Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1110lookup caching possible.
1111
b8871f35
L
1112@item common
1113Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1114link.
1115
cd6d6c15 1116@item defs
560e09e9 1117Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1118shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1119
6aa29e7b
JJ
1120@item execstack
1121Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1122
b039ef04
L
1123@item global
1124This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1125the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1126of subsequently loaded libraries.
1127
cd6d6c15
NC
1128@item initfirst
1129This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1130It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1131before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1132the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1133the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1134objects.
1135
1136@item interpose
1137Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1138but the primary executable.
1139
5fa222e4
AM
1140@item lazy
1141When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1142dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1143the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1144Lazy binding is the default.
1145
cd6d6c15
NC
1146@item loadfltr
1147Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1148runtime.
1149
1150@item muldefs
1151Allows multiple definitions.
1152
1153@item nocombreloc
1154Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1155
b8871f35
L
1156@item nocommon
1157Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1158link.
1159
cd6d6c15 1160@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1161Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1162defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1163
1164@item nodefaultlib
1165Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1166ignore any default library search paths.
1167
1168@item nodelete
1169Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1170
1171@item nodlopen
1172Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1173
1174@item nodump
1175Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1176
6aa29e7b
JJ
1177@item noexecstack
1178Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1179
8dfef1bd
L
1180@item text
1181Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1182
1183@item notext
1184Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1185
1186@item textoff
1187Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1188
6aa29e7b
JJ
1189@item norelro
1190Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1191
cd6d6c15
NC
1192@item now
1193When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1194dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1195when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1196deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1197first called.
1198
1199@item origin
1200Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1201
6aa29e7b
JJ
1202@item relro
1203Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1204
24718e3b
L
1205@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1206Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1207
1208@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1209Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1210
04c3a755
NS
1211@item stack-size=@var{value}
1212Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1213Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1214@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1215
d258b828
IZ
1216@item bndplt
1217Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1218
889c2a67
L
1219@item noextern-protected-data
1220Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1221library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1222to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1223generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1224module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1225i386 and x86-64.
1226
aec6b87e
L
1227@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1228Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1229This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1230dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1231Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1232
4c10bbaa
L
1233@item noreloc-overflow
1234Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1235relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1236overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1237
caa65211
L
1238@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1239@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1240@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1241@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1242@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1243Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1244to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1245@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1246@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1247@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1248@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1249@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1250Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1251
cd6d6c15
NC
1252@end table
1253
ece2d90e 1254Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1255
1256@kindex -(
1257@cindex groups of archives
1258@item -( @var{archives} -)
1259@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1260The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1261either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1262
1263The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1264references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1265the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1266archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1267object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1268would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1269they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1270resolved.
1271
1272Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1273it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1274more archives.
1275
69da35b5
NC
1276@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1277@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1278@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1279@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1280Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1281recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1282and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1283the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1284behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1285so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1286restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1287
4a43e768
AM
1288@kindex --as-needed
1289@kindex --no-as-needed
1290@item --as-needed
1291@itemx --no-as-needed
1292This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1293on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1294the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1295on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1296needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1297emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1298non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1299the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1300non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1301Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1302the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1303needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1304from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1305
e56f61be
L
1306@kindex --add-needed
1307@kindex --no-add-needed
1308@item --add-needed
1309@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1310These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1311their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1312options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1313and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1314
252b5132
RH
1315@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1316@item -assert @var{keyword}
1317This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1318
1319@kindex -Bdynamic
1320@kindex -dy
1321@kindex -call_shared
1322@item -Bdynamic
1323@itemx -dy
1324@itemx -call_shared
1325Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1326for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1327default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1328for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1329multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1330@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1331
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332@kindex -Bgroup
1333@item -Bgroup
1334Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1335section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1336object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1337@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1338only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1339
252b5132
RH
1340@kindex -Bstatic
1341@kindex -dn
1342@kindex -non_shared
1343@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1344@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1345@itemx -dn
1346@itemx -non_shared
1347@itemx -static
1348Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1349platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1350variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1351may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1352library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1353option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1354option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1355shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1356references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1357libraries.
252b5132
RH
1358
1359@kindex -Bsymbolic
1360@item -Bsymbolic
1361When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1362definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1363for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1364within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1365@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1366executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1367the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1368support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1369
40b36307
L
1370@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1371@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1372When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1373symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1374This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1375when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1376to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1378libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1379
55255dae
L
1380@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1381@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1382Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1383typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1384global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1385within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1386to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1387in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1388which support shared libraries.
1389
1390The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1391scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1392
40b36307
L
1393@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1394@item --dynamic-list-data
1395Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1396
1397@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1398@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1399Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1400is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1401
0b8a70d9
L
1402@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1403@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1404Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1405
252b5132
RH
1406@kindex --check-sections
1407@kindex --no-check-sections
1408@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1409@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1410Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1411been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1412perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1413suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1414allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1415restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1416Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1417force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1418option.
252b5132 1419
ddbb8a31
NC
1420@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1421@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1422@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1423@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1424This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1425by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1426command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1427output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1428input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1429specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1430follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1431behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1432
1433This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1434libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1435mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1436their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1437required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1438the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1439dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1440symbols.
1441
252b5132
RH
1442@cindex cross reference table
1443@kindex --cref
1444@item --cref
1445Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1446generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1447Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1448
1449The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1450easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1451sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1452symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1453definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1454where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1455symbol are listed.
252b5132 1456
4818e05f
AM
1457@cindex common allocation
1458@kindex --no-define-common
1459@item --no-define-common
1460This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1461The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1462@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1463
1464The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1465the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1466of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1467forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1468Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1469from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1470This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1471and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1472duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1473paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1474
252b5132 1475@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1477@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1478Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1479address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1480times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1481limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1482context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1483symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1484constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1485using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1486@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1487equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1488
1489@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1490@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1491@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1492@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1493@itemx --no-demangle
1494These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1495and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1496present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1497underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1498mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1499different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1500to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1501demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1502is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1503
1504@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1505@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1506@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1507@item -I@var{file}
1508@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1509Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1510generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1511linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1512doing.
1513
9b8b325a
RF
1514@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1515@item --no-dynamic-linker
1516When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1517linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1518executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1519entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1520
7ce691ae 1521@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1522@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1523@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1524@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1525Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1526with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1527
252b5132
RH
1528@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1529@item --force-exe-suffix
1530Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1531
1532If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1533@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1534the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1535option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1536Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1537it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1538
1539@kindex --gc-sections
1540@kindex --no-gc-sections
1541@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1542@item --gc-sections
1543@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1544Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1545targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1546performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1547@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1548collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1549implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1550
d5465ba2
AM
1551@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1552examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1553symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1554command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1555referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1556libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1557referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1558the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1559relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1560
ac69cbc6 1561This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1562@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1563specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1564a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1565
c17d87de
NC
1566@kindex --print-gc-sections
1567@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1568@cindex garbage collection
1569@item --print-gc-sections
1570@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1571List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1572printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1573collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1574default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1575be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1576line.
1577
22185505 1578@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1579@cindex garbage collection
1580@item --gc-keep-exported
1581When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1582collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1583default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1584executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1585collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1586Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1587it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1588ELF format targets.
1589
30824704
RM
1590@kindex --print-output-format
1591@cindex output format
1592@item --print-output-format
1593Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1594other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1595in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1596
3604cb1f
TG
1597@kindex --print-memory-usage
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@item --print-memory-usage
1600Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1601the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1602quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1603headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1604parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1605
1606@smallexample
1607Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1608 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1609 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1610@end smallexample
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex help
1613@cindex usage
1614@kindex --help
1615@item --help
1616Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1617
ea20a7da
CC
1618@kindex --target-help
1619@item --target-help
1620Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1621
2509a395
SL
1622@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1623@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1624Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1625@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1626
1627@cindex memory usage
1628@kindex --no-keep-memory
1629@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1630@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1631symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1632instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1633necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1634while linking a large executable.
1635
1636@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1637@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1638@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1639@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1640Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1641is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1642The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1643behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1644libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1645
aa713662
L
1646@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1647@kindex -z muldefs
1648@item --allow-multiple-definition
1649@itemx -z muldefs
1650Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1651report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1652first definition will be used.
1653
b79e8c78 1654@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1655@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1656@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1657@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1658Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1659This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1660determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1661shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1662how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1663
903249d7
NC
1664The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1665referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1666an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1667a shared library.
1668
1669The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1670libraries specified at link time are that:
1671
1672@itemize @bullet
1673@item
1674A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1675that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1676resolvable at load time.
1677@item
1678There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1679symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1680
1681The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1682select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1683architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1684appropriate memset function.
1685@end itemize
b79e8c78 1686
31941635
L
1687@kindex --no-undefined-version
1688@item --no-undefined-version
1689Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1690it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1691will be issued instead.
1692
3e3b46e5
PB
1693@kindex --default-symver
1694@item --default-symver
1695Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1696exported symbols.
1697
1698@kindex --default-imported-symver
1699@item --default-imported-symver
1700Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1701imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1702
252b5132
RH
1703@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1704@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1705Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1706files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1707been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1708This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1709errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1710have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1711inappropriate.
1712
fe7929ce
AM
1713@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1714@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1715Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1716library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1717
252b5132
RH
1718@kindex --no-whole-archive
1719@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1720Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1721archive files.
1722
1723@cindex output file after errors
1724@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1725@item --noinhibit-exec
1726Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1727Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1728errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1729when it issues any error whatsoever.
1730
0a9c1c8e
CD
1731@kindex -nostdlib
1732@item -nostdlib
1733Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1734command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1735(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1736
252b5132 1737@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1738@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1739@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1740@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1741file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1742@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1743object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1744object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1745should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1746usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1747name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1748list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1749command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1750this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1751@end ifclear
1752
76359541
TP
1753@kindex --out-implib
1754@item --out-implib @var{file}
1755Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1756the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1757library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1758may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1759behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1760step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1761the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1762
36af4a4e
JJ
1763@kindex -pie
1764@kindex --pic-executable
1765@item -pie
1766@itemx --pic-executable
1767@cindex position independent executables
1768Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1769ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1770libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1771address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1772normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1773defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1774
252b5132
RH
1775@kindex -qmagic
1776@item -qmagic
1777This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1778
1779@kindex -Qy
1780@item -Qy
1781This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1782
1783@kindex --relax
1784@cindex synthesizing linker
1785@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1786@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1787@item --relax
28d5f677 1788@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1789An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1790@ifset GENERIC
1791This option is only supported on a few targets.
1792@end ifset
1793@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1794@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1795@end ifset
1796@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1797@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1798@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1799@ifset XTENSA
1800@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1801@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1802@ifset M68HC11
1803@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1804@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1805@ifset NIOSII
1806@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1807@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1808@ifset POWERPC
1809@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1810@end ifset
252b5132 1811
28d5f677
NC
1812On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1813global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1814addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1815synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1816instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1817
1818On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1819debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1820@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1821This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1822family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1823@end ifset
1824
1825@ifset GENERIC
1826On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1827but ignored.
1828@end ifset
1829
28d5f677
NC
1830On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1831@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1832
252b5132
RH
1833@cindex retaining specified symbols
1834@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1835@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1837@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1838Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1839discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1840symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1841@ifset GENERIC
1842(such as VxWorks)
1843@end ifset
1844where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1845run-time memory.
1846
1847@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1848or symbols needed for relocations.
1849
1850You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1851line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1852
1853@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1854@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1855@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1856@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1857Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1858linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1859arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1860them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1861also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1862objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1863@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1864ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1865@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1866
ff5dcc92 1867The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1868SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1869@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1870runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1871options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1872gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1873file systems.
252b5132 1874
ff5dcc92 1875For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1876followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1877the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1878@end ifset
1879
1880@ifset GENERIC
1881@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1882@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1883@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1884When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1885happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1886of the input files.
1887
1888When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1889non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1890shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1891explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1892specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1893@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1894either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1895appearing multiple times.
1896
e680a6b6
NC
1897The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1898directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1899containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1900and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
190164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1902
1903The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1904@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1905supported.
1906
28c309a2
NC
1907This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1908that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1909is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1910runtime linker would do.
1911
252b5132 1912The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1913libraries:
252b5132
RH
1914@enumerate
1915@item
ff5dcc92 1916Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1917@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1918Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1919between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1920specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1921used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1922at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1923by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1924the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1925@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1926On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1927@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1928environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1929@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1930On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1931directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1932@item
a1b8d843 1933For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1934variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1935@item
ec4eb78a
L
1936For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1937@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1938libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1939@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1940@item
252b5132
RH
1941The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1942@item
1943For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1944exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1945@end enumerate
1946
1947If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1948warning and continue with the link.
1949@end ifset
1950
1951@kindex -shared
1952@kindex -Bshareable
1953@item -shared
1954@itemx -Bshareable
1955@cindex shared libraries
1956Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1957and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1958shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1959undefined symbols in the link.
1960
252b5132 1961@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1962@item --sort-common
1963@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1964@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1965This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1966ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1967sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1968eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1969between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1970specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1971
2509a395
SL
1972@kindex --sort-section=name
1973@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1974This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1975patterns in the linker script.
1976
2509a395
SL
1977@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1978@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1979This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1980patterns in the linker script.
1981
252b5132 1982@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1983@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1984Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1985each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1986size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1987
1988@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1989@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1990Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1991output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1992This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1993certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1994cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1995that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1996support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1997input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1998more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1999many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2000
2001@kindex --stats
2002@item --stats
2003Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2004as execution time and memory usage.
2005
2509a395 2006@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2007@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2008Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2009configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2010that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2011
252b5132
RH
2012@kindex --traditional-format
2013@cindex traditional format
2014@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2015For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2016the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2017use the traditional format instead.
2018
2019@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2020For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2021symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2022full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2023@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2024trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2025combine duplicate entries.
2026
2509a395
SL
2027@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2028@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2029Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2030address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2031times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2032line.
2033@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2034for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2035@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2036should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2037sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2038
2509a395
SL
2039@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2040@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2041@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2042@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2043@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2044@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2045@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2046Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2047@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2048
2509a395
SL
2049@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2050@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2051@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2052When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2053byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2054
9d5777a3
RM
2055@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2056@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2057@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2058When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2059the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2060text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2061
0d705e9f
AM
2062@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2063@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2064@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2065When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2066model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2067
560e09e9
NC
2068@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2069@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2070Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2071values for @samp{method}:
2072
2073@table @samp
2074@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2075Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2076
2077@item report-all
da8bce14 2078Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2079
2080@item ignore-in-object-files
2081Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2082ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2083
2084@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2085Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2086ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2087when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2088libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2089command line.
2090@end table
2091
2092The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2093by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2094
2095Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2096unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2097can change this to a warning.
2098
1715a13c
L
2099@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2100@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2101@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2102@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2103Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2104supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2105the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2106argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2107
2108@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2109@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2110@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2111Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2112used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2113about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2114is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2115see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2116use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2117symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2118@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2119
7ce691ae 2120@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2121@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2122@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2123@item --warn-common
2124Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2125a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2126but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2127you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2128Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2129warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2130
2131There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2132
2133@table @samp
2134@item int i = 1;
2135A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2136file.
2137
2138@item extern int i;
2139An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2140There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2141variable somewhere.
2142
2143@item int i;
2144A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2145variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2146The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2147single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2148size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2149a definition of the same variable.
2150@end table
2151
2152The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2153Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2154just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2155encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2156a common symbol.
2157
2158@enumerate
2159@item
2160Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2161definition for the symbol.
2162@smallexample
2163@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2164 overridden by definition
2165@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2166@end smallexample
2167
2168@item
2169Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2170the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2171except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2172@smallexample
2173@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2174 overriding common
2175@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2176@end smallexample
2177
2178@item
2179Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2180@smallexample
2181@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2182 of `@var{symbol}'
2183@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2184@end smallexample
2185
2186@item
2187Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2188@smallexample
2189@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2190 overridden by larger common
2191@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2192@end smallexample
2193
2194@item
2195Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2196the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2197encountered in a different order.
2198@smallexample
2199@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2200 overriding smaller common
2201@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2202@end smallexample
2203@end enumerate
2204
2205@kindex --warn-constructors
2206@item --warn-constructors
2207Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2208object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2209detect the use of global constructors.
2210
2211@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2212@item --warn-multiple-gp
2213Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2214This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2215Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2216section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2217of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2218base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2219base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2220bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2221large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2222values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2223option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2224
2225@kindex --warn-once
2226@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2227@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2228@item --warn-once
2229Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2230which refers to it.
2231
2232@kindex --warn-section-align
2233@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2234@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2235@item --warn-section-align
2236Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2237alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2238The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2239is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2240the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2241
8fdd7217
NC
2242@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2243@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2244Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2245
a0c402a5
L
2246@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2247@item --warn-alternate-em
2248Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2249
560e09e9
NC
2250@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2251@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2252If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2253@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2254This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2255
2256@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2257@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2258This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2259it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2260
252b5132
RH
2261@kindex --whole-archive
2262@cindex including an entire archive
2263@item --whole-archive
2264For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2265@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2266in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2267files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2268library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2269library. This option may be used more than once.
2270
7ec229ce 2271Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2272about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2273Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2274list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2275your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2276
2509a395
SL
2277@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2278@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2279Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2280@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2281undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2282@var{symbol}.
2283
2284This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2285wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2286wishes to call the system function, it should call
2287@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2288
2289Here is a trivial example:
2290
2291@smallexample
2292void *
cc2f008e 2293__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2294@{
cc2f008e 2295 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2296 return __real_malloc (c);
2297@}
2298@end smallexample
2299
ff5dcc92 2300If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2301all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2302instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2303call the real @code{malloc} function.
2304
2305You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2306links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2307you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2308file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2309call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2310
6aa29e7b 2311@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2312@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2313@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2314@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2315Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2316(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2317section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2318
e41b3a13
JJ
2319@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2320@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2321Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2322generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2323if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2324
6c1439be
L
2325@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2326@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2327@item --enable-new-dtags
2328@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2329This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2330systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2331@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2332and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2333If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2334created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2335those options are only available for ELF systems.
2336
2d643429 2337@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2338@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2339Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2340close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2341time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2342increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2343value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2344
fdc90cb4
JJ
2345@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2346@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2347Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2348@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2349new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2350the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2351hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2352
0ce398f1
L
2353@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2354@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2355@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2356@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2357@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2358@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2359@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2360@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2361On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2362compressed using zlib.
2363
2364@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2365sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2366DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2367instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2368also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2369sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2370
2371The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2372@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2373
2374Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2375sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2376for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2377uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2378
2379The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2380involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2381default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2382@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2383
35835446
JR
2384@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2385@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2386This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2387linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2388for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2389about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2390
4f9c04f7 2391Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23921021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2393run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2394has been used.
2395
2396The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2397enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2398
c0065db7
RM
2399@kindex --build-id
2400@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2401@item --build-id
2402@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2403Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2404or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2405unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2406@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2407@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2408@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2409the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2410string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2411@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2412is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2413
2414The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2415that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2416unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2417to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2418file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2419string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2420
2421Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2422@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2423@end table
2424
0285c67d
NC
2425@c man end
2426
36f63dca 2427@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2428
0285c67d
NC
2429@c man begin OPTIONS
2430
ff5dcc92 2431The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2432the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2433normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2434use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2435@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2436like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2437symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2438object file).
2439
2440In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2441support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2442PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2443values by either a space or an equals sign.
2444
ff5dcc92 2445@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2446
2447@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2448@item --add-stdcall-alias
2449If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2450as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2451[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2452
2453@kindex --base-file
2454@item --base-file @var{file}
2455Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2456addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2457@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2458[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2459
2460@kindex --dll
2461@item --dll
2462Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2463@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2464file.
bb10df36 2465[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2466
88183869
DK
2467@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2468@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2469@item --enable-long-section-names
2470@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2471The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2472the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2473for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2474fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2475to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2476allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2477disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2478generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2479as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2480with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2481GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2482information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2483option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2484section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2485when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2486image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2487[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2488
252b5132
RH
2489@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2490@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2491@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2492@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2493If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2494do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2495only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2496resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2497undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2498@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2499to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2500warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2501import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2502to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2503feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2504@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2505mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2506[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2507
522f09cd
KT
2508@kindex --leading-underscore
2509@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2510@item --leading-underscore
2511@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2512For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2513in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2514disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2515
252b5132
RH
2516@cindex DLLs, creating
2517@kindex --export-all-symbols
2518@item --export-all-symbols
2519If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2520be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2521otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2522explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2523attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2524option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2525@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2526@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2527exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2528re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2529such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2530@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2531@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2532Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2533not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2534extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2535(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2536These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2537@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2538@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2539@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2540@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2541[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2542
2543@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2544@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2545Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2546exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2547[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2548
2927aaca
NC
2549@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2550@item --exclude-all-symbols
2551Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2552[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2553
252b5132
RH
2554@kindex --file-alignment
2555@item --file-alignment
2556Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2557file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2558512.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2560
2561@cindex heap size
2562@kindex --heap
2563@item --heap @var{reserve}
2564@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2565Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2566to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2567committed.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2569
2570@cindex image base
2571@kindex --image-base
2572@item --image-base @var{value}
2573Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2574the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2575is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2576your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2577other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2578for dlls.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2580
2581@kindex --kill-at
2582@item --kill-at
2583If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2584symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2585[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2586
26d2d8a2
BF
2587@kindex --large-address-aware
2588@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2589If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2590header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2591greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2592or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2593section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2594[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2595
f69a2f97
NC
2596@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2597@item --disable-large-address-aware
2598Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2599This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2600driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2601addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2602[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2603
252b5132
RH
2604@kindex --major-image-version
2605@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2606Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2608
2609@kindex --major-os-version
2610@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2611Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2612[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2613
2614@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2615@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2616Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2617[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2618
2619@kindex --minor-image-version
2620@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2621Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2623
2624@kindex --minor-os-version
2625@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2626Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2628
2629@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2630@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2631Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2632[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@cindex DEF files, creating
2635@cindex DLLs, creating
2636@kindex --output-def
2637@item --output-def @var{file}
2638The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2639file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2640(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2641library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2642automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2643[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2644
b044cda1 2645@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2646@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2647@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2648@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2649Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2650@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2651By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2652for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2653execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2654[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2655
2656@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2657@item --disable-auto-image-base
2658Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2659user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2660default.
bb10df36 2661[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2662
2663@cindex DLLs, linking to
2664@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2665@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2666When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2667search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2668@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2669between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2670uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2671@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2673
2674@kindex --enable-auto-import
2675@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2676Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2677DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2678building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2679'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2680to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2681specification published by Microsoft.
2682
e2a83dd0
NC
2683Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2684data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2685placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2686around a problem with consts that is described here:
2687http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2688
4d8907ac
DS
2689Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2690see this message:
0d888aac 2691
ece2d90e 2692"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2693documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2694
ece2d90e
NC
2695This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2696ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2697allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2698fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2699constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2700multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2701this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2702of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2703the warning, and exit.
2704
2705There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2706data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2707
2fa9fc65
NC
2708One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2709of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2710this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2711
c0065db7
RM
2712A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2713that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2714there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2715a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2716
2717@example
2718extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2719extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2720 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2721@end example
2722
2723or
2724
2725@example
2726extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2727extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2728 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2729@end example
2730
c0065db7 2731For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2732is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2733
2734@example
2735extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2736extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2737 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2738@end example
2739
c406afaf
NC
2740or
2741
2742@example
2743extern long long extern_ll;
2744extern_ll -->
2745 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2746@end example
2747
2fa9fc65 2748A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2749'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2750@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2751requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2752building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2753merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2754between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2755constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2756
2757Original:
2758@example
2759--foo.h
2760extern int arr[];
2761--foo.c
2762#include "foo.h"
2763void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2764 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2765@}
2766@end example
2767
2768Solution 1:
2769@example
2770--foo.h
2771extern int arr[];
2772--foo.c
2773#include "foo.h"
2774void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2775 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2776 volatile int *parr = arr;
2777 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2778@}
2779@end example
2780
2781Solution 2:
2782@example
2783--foo.h
2784/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2785#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2786 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2787#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2788#else
2789#define FOO_IMPORT
2790#endif
2791extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2792--foo.c
2793#include "foo.h"
2794void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2795 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2796@}
2797@end example
2798
c0065db7 2799A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2800library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2801for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2802functions).
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2804
2805@kindex --disable-auto-import
2806@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2807Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2808@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2809[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2810
2fa9fc65
NC
2811@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2812@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2813If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2814that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2815a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2816environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2817[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2818
2819@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2820@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2821Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2822DLLs.
bb10df36 2823[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2824
b044cda1
CW
2825@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2826@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2827Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2828[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2829
252b5132
RH
2830@kindex --section-alignment
2831@item --section-alignment
2832Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2833addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2834[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2835
2836@cindex stack size
2837@kindex --stack
2838@item --stack @var{reserve}
2839@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2840Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2841to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2842committed.
bb10df36 2843[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2844
2845@kindex --subsystem
2846@item --subsystem @var{which}
2847@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2848@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2849Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2850legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2851@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2852the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2853@var{which}.
bb10df36 2854[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2855
2f563b51
DK
2856The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2857of the PE file header:
2858[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2859
2d5c3743
NC
2860@kindex --high-entropy-va
2861@item --high-entropy-va
2862Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2863(ASLR).
2864
2f563b51
DK
2865@kindex --dynamicbase
2866@item --dynamicbase
2867The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2868randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2869Vista for i386 PE targets.
2870
2871@kindex --forceinteg
2872@item --forceinteg
2873Code integrity checks are enforced.
2874
2875@kindex --nxcompat
2876@item --nxcompat
2877The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2878This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2879
2880@kindex --no-isolation
2881@item --no-isolation
2882Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2883
2884@kindex --no-seh
2885@item --no-seh
2886The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2887this image.
2888
2889@kindex --no-bind
2890@item --no-bind
2891Do not bind this image.
2892
2893@kindex --wdmdriver
2894@item --wdmdriver
2895The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2896
2f563b51
DK
2897@kindex --tsaware
2898@item --tsaware
2899The image is Terminal Server aware.
2900
0cb112f7
CF
2901@kindex --insert-timestamp
2902@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2903@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2904Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2905as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2906other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2907will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2908same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2909can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2910that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2911identically.
252b5132
RH
2912@end table
2913
0285c67d
NC
2914@c man end
2915
ac145307
BS
2916@ifset C6X
2917@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2918
2919@c man begin OPTIONS
2920
2921The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2922libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2923all executables use an index of 0.
2924
2925@table @gcctabopt
2926
2927@kindex --dsbt-size
2928@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2929This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2930or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2931entries.
2932
2933@kindex --dsbt-index
2934@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2935This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2936to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2937executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2938@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2939
fbd9ad90
PB
2940@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2941The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2942exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2943
ac145307
BS
2944@end table
2945
2946@c man end
2947@end ifset
2948
93fd0973
SC
2949@ifset M68HC11
2950@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2951
2952@c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2955memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2956
2957@table @gcctabopt
2958
2959@kindex --no-trampoline
2960@item --no-trampoline
2961This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2962is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2963instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2964
2965@kindex --bank-window
2966@item --bank-window @var{name}
2967This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2968the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2969The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2970paging and addresses within the memory window.
2971
2972@end table
2973
2974@c man end
2975@end ifset
2976
7fb9f789
NC
2977@ifset M68K
2978@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2979
2980@c man begin OPTIONS
2981
2982The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2983when linking for 68K targets.
2984
2985@table @gcctabopt
2986
2987@kindex --got
2988@item --got=@var{type}
2989This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2990@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2991@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2992Info entry for @file{ld}.
2993
2994@end table
2995
2996@c man end
2997@end ifset
2998
833794fc
MR
2999@ifset MIPS
3000@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3001
3002@c man begin OPTIONS
3003
3004The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3005generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3006linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3007
3008@table @gcctabopt
3009
3010@kindex --insn32
3011@item --insn32
3012@kindex --no-insn32
3013@itemx --no-insn32
3014These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3015generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3016or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
301732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3018used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3019possible.
3020
8b10b0b3
MR
3021@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3022@item --ignore-branch-isa
3023@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3024@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3025These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3026transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3027accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3028is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3029instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3030equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3031calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3032a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3033an error.
3034
833794fc
MR
3035@end table
3036
3037@c man end
3038@end ifset
3039
252b5132
RH
3040@ifset UsesEnvVars
3041@node Environment
3042@section Environment Variables
3043
0285c67d
NC
3044@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3045
560e09e9 3046You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3047@ifclear SingleFormat
3048@code{GNUTARGET},
3049@end ifclear
3050@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3051
36f63dca 3052@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3053@kindex GNUTARGET
3054@cindex default input format
3055@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3056use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3057of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3058@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3059of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3060attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3061this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3062there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3063object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3064BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3065in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3066@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3067
3068@kindex LDEMULATION
3069@cindex default emulation
3070@cindex emulation, default
3071@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3072@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3073behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3074available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3075the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3076variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3077linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3078
3079@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3080@cindex demangling, default
3081Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3082@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3083default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3084a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3085may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3086options.
3087
0285c67d
NC
3088@c man end
3089@end ifset
3090
252b5132
RH
3091@node Scripts
3092@chapter Linker Scripts
3093
3094@cindex scripts
3095@cindex linker scripts
3096@cindex command files
3097Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3098written in the linker command language.
3099
3100The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3101the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3102the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3103more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3104direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3105described below.
3106
3107The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3108yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3109linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3110to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3111such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3112
3113You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3114line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3115default linker script.
3116
3117You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3118to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3119Linker Scripts}.
3120
3121@menu
3122* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3123* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3124* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3125* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3126* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3127* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3128* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3129* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3130* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3131* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3132* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3133@end menu
3134
3135@node Basic Script Concepts
3136@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3137@cindex linker script concepts
3138We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3139describe the linker script language.
3140
3141The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3142file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3143@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3144The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3145purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3146among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3147section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3148in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3149
3150Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3151also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3152contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3153the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3154A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3155area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3156loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3157which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3158of debugging information.
3159
3160Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3161first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3162the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3163@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3164section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3165same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3166is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3167(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3168based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3169RAM address would be the VMA.
3170
3171You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3172program with the @samp{-h} option.
3173
3174Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3175@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3176has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3177information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3178will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3179static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3180referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3181
3182You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3183program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3184option.
3185
3186@node Script Format
3187@section Linker Script Format
3188@cindex linker script format
3189Linker scripts are text files.
3190
3191You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3192either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3193symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3194generally ignored.
3195
3196Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3197If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3198otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3199double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3200file name.
3201
3202You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3203@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3204to whitespace.
3205
3206@node Simple Example
3207@section Simple Linker Script Example
3208@cindex linker script example
3209@cindex example of linker script
3210Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3211
3212The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3213@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3214memory layout of the output file.
3215
3216The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3217describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3218code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3219@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3220Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3221your input files.
3222
3223For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32240x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3225linker script which will do that:
3226@smallexample
3227SECTIONS
3228@{
3229 . = 0x10000;
3230 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3231 . = 0x8000000;
3232 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3233 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3234@}
3235@end smallexample
3236
3237You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3238followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3239descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3240
252b5132
RH
3241The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3242sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3243counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3244other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3245current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3246incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3247@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3248
3249The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3250required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3251after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3252which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3253wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3254means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3255
3256Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3257@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3258@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3259
3260The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3261the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3262at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3263output section, the value of the location counter will be
3264@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3265effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3266immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3267
3268The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3269alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3270example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3271sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3272may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3273sections.
3274
3275That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3276
3277@node Simple Commands
3278@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3279@cindex linker script simple commands
3280In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3281
3282@menu
3283* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3284* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3285@ifclear SingleFormat
3286* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3287@end ifclear
3288
4a93e180 3289* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3290* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3291@end menu
3292
3293@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3294@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3295@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3296@cindex start of execution
3297@cindex first instruction
3298@cindex entry point
3299The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3300point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3301entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3302@smallexample
3303ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3304@end smallexample
3305
3306There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3307entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3308stopping when one of them succeeds:
3309@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3310@item
252b5132 3311the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3312@item
252b5132 3313the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3314@item
3ab904c4
NC
3315the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3316targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3317check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3318@item
252b5132 3319the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3320@item
252b5132
RH
3321The address @code{0}.
3322@end itemize
3323
3324@node File Commands
36f63dca 3325@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3326@cindex linker script file commands
3327Several linker script commands deal with files.
3328
3329@table @code
3330@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3331@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3332@cindex including a linker script
3333Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3334be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3335with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
333610 levels deep.
3337
4006703d
NS
3338You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3339@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3340
252b5132
RH
3341@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3342@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3343@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3344@cindex input files in linker scripts
3345@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3346@cindex linker script input object files
3347The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3348in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3349
3350For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3351a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3352then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3353
3354In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3355script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3356
e3f2db7f
AO
3357In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3358with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3359located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3360for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3361open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3362linker will search through the archive library search path.
3363The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3364as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3365description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3366
ff5dcc92 3367If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3368name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3369@samp{-l}.
3370
3371When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3372files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3373script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3374
3375@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3376@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3377@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3378@cindex grouping input files
3379The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3380files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3381new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3382in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3383
b717d30e
JJ
3384@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3385@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3386@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3387This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3388commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3389as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3390with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3391when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3392@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3393and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3394setting afterwards.
3395
252b5132
RH
3396@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3397@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3398@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3399The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3400@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3401@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3402Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3403precedence.
3404
3405You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3406output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3407
3408@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3409@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3410@cindex library search path in linker script
3411@cindex archive search path in linker script
3412@cindex search path in linker script
3413The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3414@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3415@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3416on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3417are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3418the command line option are searched first.
3419
3420@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3421@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3422@cindex first input file
3423The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3424that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3425though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3426when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3427first file.
3428@end table
3429
3430@ifclear SingleFormat
3431@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3432@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3433A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3434
3435@table @code
3436@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3437@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3438@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3439@cindex output file format in linker script
3440The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3441output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3442exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3443(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3444line option takes precedence.
3445
3446You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3447formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3448This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3449desired endianness.
3450
3451If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3452will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3453output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3454used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3455
3456For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3457command:
3458@smallexample
3459OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3460@end smallexample
3461This says that the default format for the output file is
3462@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3463option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3464format.
3465
3466@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3467@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3468@cindex input file format in linker script
3469The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3470files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3471This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3472(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3473is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3474command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3475@end table
3476@end ifclear
3477
4a93e180
NC
3478@node REGION_ALIAS
3479@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3480@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3481@cindex region alias
3482@cindex region names
3483
3484Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3485@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3486
3487@smallexample
3488REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3489@end smallexample
3490
3491The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3492memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3493to memory regions. An example follows.
3494
3495Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3496memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3497that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3498non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3499access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3500read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3501sections:
3502
3503@itemize @bullet
3504@item
3505@code{.text} program code;
3506@item
3507@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3508@item
3509@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3510@item
3511@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3512@end itemize
3513
3514The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3515part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3516output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3517systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3518@code{C}:
3519@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3520@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3521@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3522@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3523@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3524@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3525@end multitable
3526The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3527loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3528the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3529the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3530
3531The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3532includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3533memory layout:
3534@smallexample
3535INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3536
3537SECTIONS
3538 @{
3539 .text :
3540 @{
3541 *(.text)
3542 @} > REGION_TEXT
3543 .rodata :
3544 @{
3545 *(.rodata)
3546 rodata_end = .;
3547 @} > REGION_RODATA
3548 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3549 @{
3550 data_start = .;
3551 *(.data)
3552 @} > REGION_DATA
3553 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3554 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3555 .bss :
3556 @{
3557 *(.bss)
3558 @} > REGION_BSS
3559 @}
3560@end smallexample
3561
3562Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3563regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3564variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3565@table @code
3566@item A
3567Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3568@smallexample
3569MEMORY
3570 @{
3571 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3572 @}
3573
3574REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3575REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3576REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3577REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3578@end smallexample
3579@item B
3580Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3581into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3582@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3583@smallexample
3584MEMORY
3585 @{
3586 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3587 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3588 @}
3589
3590REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3591REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3592REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3593REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3594@end smallexample
3595@item C
3596Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3597@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3598initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3599system start into the @code{RAM}.
3600@smallexample
3601MEMORY
3602 @{
3603 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3604 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3605 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3606 @}
3607
3608REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3609REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3610REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3611REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3612@end smallexample
3613@end table
3614
3615It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3616@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3617necessary:
3618@smallexample
3619#include <string.h>
3620
3621extern char data_start [];
3622extern char data_size [];
3623extern char data_load_start [];
3624
3625void copy_data(void)
3626@{
3627 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3628 @{
3629 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3630 @}
3631@}
3632@end smallexample
3633
252b5132 3634@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3635@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3636There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3637
3638@table @code
3639@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3640@kindex ASSERT
3641@cindex assertion in linker script
3642Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3643with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3644
fd1c4238
NC
3645Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3646take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3647inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3648for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3649symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3650
3651@smallexample
3652 .stack :
3653 @{
3654 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3655 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3656 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3657 @}
3658@end smallexample
3659
3660will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3661PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3662can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3663
3664@smallexample
3665 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3666 .stack :
3667 @{
3668 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3669 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3670 @}
3671@end smallexample
3672
3673will work.
3674
252b5132
RH
3675@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3676@kindex EXTERN
3677@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3678Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3679symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3680modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3681each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3682command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3683
3684@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3685@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3686@cindex common allocation in linker script
3687This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3688to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3689output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3690
4818e05f
AM
3691@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3692@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3693@cindex common allocation in linker script
3694This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3695command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3696to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3697
53d25da6
AM
3698@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3699@kindex INSERT
3700@cindex insert user script into default script
3701This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3702augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3703inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3704@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3705default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3706sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3707linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3708insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3709linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3710default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3711of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3712to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3713is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3714
3715@smallexample
3716SECTIONS
3717@{
3718 OVERLAY :
3719 @{
3720 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3721 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3722 @}
3723@}
3724INSERT AFTER .text;
3725@end smallexample
3726
252b5132
RH
3727@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3728@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3729@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3730This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3731references among certain output sections.
3732
3733In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3734using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3735will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3736errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3737a function defined in the other section.
3738
3739The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3740@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3741an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3742@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3743names.
3744
cdf96953
MF
3745@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3746@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3747@cindex cross references
3748This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3749references to one section from a list of other sections.
3750
3751The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3752output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3753a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3754there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3755must never call back.
3756
3757The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3758The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3759If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3760the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3761status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3762names, not input section names.
3763
252b5132
RH
3764@ifclear SingleFormat
3765@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3766@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3767@cindex machine architecture
3768@cindex architecture
3769Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3770of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3771architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3772the @samp{-f} option.
3773@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3774
3775@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3776@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3777This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3778@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3779in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3780@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3781@end table
3782
3783@node Assignments
3784@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3785@cindex assignment in scripts
3786@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3787@cindex variables, defining
3788You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3789the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3790
3791@menu
3792* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3793* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3794* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3795* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3796* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3797@end menu
3798
3799@node Simple Assignments
3800@subsection Simple Assignments
3801
3802You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3803
3804@table @code
3805@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3806@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3807@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3808@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3809@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3810@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3811@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3812@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3813@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3814@end table
3815
3816The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3817@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3818defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3819
3820The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3821may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3822
3823The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3824
3825Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3826
3827You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3828statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3829section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3830
3831The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3832expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3833
3834Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3835assignments may be used:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838floating_point = 0;
3839SECTIONS
3840@{
3841 .text :
3842 @{
3843 *(.text)
3844 _etext = .;
3845 @}
156e34dd 3846 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3847 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3848@}
3849@end smallexample
3850@noindent
3851In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3852zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3853the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3854defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3855upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3856
eb8476a6
MR
3857@node HIDDEN
3858@subsection HIDDEN
3859@cindex HIDDEN
3860For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3861exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3862
3863Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3864@code{HIDDEN}:
3865
3866@smallexample
3867HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3868SECTIONS
3869@{
3870 .text :
3871 @{
3872 *(.text)
3873 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3874 @}
3875 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3876 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3877@}
3878@end smallexample
3879@noindent
3880In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3881
252b5132
RH
3882@node PROVIDE
3883@subsection PROVIDE
3884@cindex PROVIDE
3885In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3886only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3887the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3888@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3889@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3890@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3891@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3892@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3893
3894Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3895@smallexample
3896SECTIONS
3897@{
3898 .text :
3899 @{
3900 *(.text)
3901 _etext = .;
3902 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3903 @}
3904@}
3905@end smallexample
3906
3907In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3908underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3909the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3910underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3911If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3912linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3913
7af8e998
L
3914@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3915@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3916@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3917Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3918hidden and won't be exported.
3919
73ae6183
NC
3920@node Source Code Reference
3921@subsection Source Code Reference
3922
3923Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3924intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3925a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3926symbol that does not have a value.
3927
3928Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3929transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3930stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3931prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3932mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3933of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3934variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3935linker script variable might be referred to as:
3936
3937@smallexample
3938 extern int foo;
3939@end smallexample
3940
3941But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3942
3943@smallexample
3944 _foo = 1000;
3945@end smallexample
3946
3947In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3948transformation has taken place.
3949
3950When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3951things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3952in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3953second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3954table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3955contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3956value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3957
3958@smallexample
3959 int foo = 1000;
3960@end smallexample
3961
10bf6894 3962creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3963holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3964number 1000 is initially stored.
3965
3966When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3967first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3968memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3969So:
3970
3971@smallexample
3972 foo = 1;
3973@end smallexample
3974
3975looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3976associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3977address. Whereas:
3978
3979@smallexample
3980 int * a = & foo;
3981@end smallexample
3982
10bf6894 3983looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3984and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3985the variable @samp{a}.
3986
3987Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3988the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3989an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3990
3991@smallexample
3992 foo = 1000;
3993@end smallexample
3994
3995creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3996the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3997address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3998linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3999access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4000
4001Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4002you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4003use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4004section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4005linker script contains these declarations:
4006
4007@smallexample
4008@group
4009 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4010 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4011 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4012@end group
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4016
4017@smallexample
4018@group
4019 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4020
73ae6183
NC
4021 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4022@end group
4023@end smallexample
4024
4025Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4026Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4027arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4028
4029@smallexample
4030@group
4031 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4032
4033 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4034@end group
4035@end smallexample
4036
4037Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4038operators.
73ae6183 4039
252b5132 4040@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4041@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4042@kindex SECTIONS
4043The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4044into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4045
4046The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4047@smallexample
4048SECTIONS
4049@{
4050 @var{sections-command}
4051 @var{sections-command}
4052 @dots{}
4053@}
4054@end smallexample
4055
4056Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4057
4058@itemize @bullet
4059@item
4060an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4061@item
4062a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063@item
4064an output section description
4065@item
4066an overlay description
4067@end itemize
4068
4069The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4070@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4071those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4072understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4073the layout of the output file.
4074
4075Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4076below.
4077
4078If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4079linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4080section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4081input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4082example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4083in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4084
4085@menu
4086* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4087* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4088* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4089* Input Section:: Input section description
4090* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4091* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4092* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4093* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4094* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4095@end menu
4096
4097@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4098@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4099The full description of an output section looks like this:
4100@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4101@group
7e7d5768 4102@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4103 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4104 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4105 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4106 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4107 @{
4108 @var{output-section-command}
4109 @var{output-section-command}
4110 @dots{}
abc9061b 4111 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4112@end group
4113@end smallexample
4114
4115Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4116
4117The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4118name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4119The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4120the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4121The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4122
4123Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4124
4125@itemize @bullet
4126@item
4127a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4128@item
4129an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4130@item
4131data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4132@item
4133a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4134@end itemize
4135
4136@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4137@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4138@cindex name, section
4139@cindex section name
4140The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4141meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4142support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4143must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4144example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4145output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4146names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4147quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4148characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4149commas must be quoted.
4150
4151The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4152Discarding}.
4153
4154@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4155@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4156@cindex address, section
4157@cindex section address
4158The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4159address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4160is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4161
4162If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4163section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4164to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4165alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4166contained within the output section.
4167
4168The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4169
4170@itemize @bullet
4171@item
4172If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4173is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4174in that region.
4175
4176@item
4177If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4178regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4179section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4180be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4181
4182@item
4183If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4184the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4185counter.
4186@end itemize
4187
4188@noindent
4189For example:
4190
252b5132
RH
4191@smallexample
4192.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4193@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4194
252b5132
RH
4195@noindent
4196and
ea5cae92 4197
252b5132
RH
4198@smallexample
4199.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4200@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4201
252b5132
RH
4202@noindent
4203are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4204@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4205counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4206counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4207input sections.
252b5132
RH
4208
4209The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4210For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4211so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4212do something like this:
4213@smallexample
4214.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4215@end smallexample
4216@noindent
4217This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4218aligned upward to the specified value.
4219
4220Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4221location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4222sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4223
4224@node Input Section
36f63dca 4225@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4226@cindex input sections
4227@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4228The most common output section command is an input section description.
4229
4230The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4231You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4232in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4233map the input files into your memory layout.
4234
4235@menu
4236* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4237* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4238* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4239* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4240* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4241@end menu
4242
4243@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4244@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4245@cindex input section basics
4246An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4247by a list of section names in parentheses.
4248
4249The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4250describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4251
4252The most common input section description is to include all input
4253sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4254include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4255@smallexample
4256*(.text)
4257@end smallexample
4258@noindent
18625d54 4259Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4260@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4261of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4262match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4263example:
252b5132 4264@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4265EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4266@end smallexample
4267@noindent
4268will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4269and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4270placed inside the section list, for example:
4271@smallexample
b4346c09 4272*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4273@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4274@noindent
4275The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4276two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4277more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4278
4279There are two ways to include more than one section:
4280@smallexample
4281*(.text .rdata)
4282*(.text) *(.rdata)
4283@end smallexample
4284@noindent
4285The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4286@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4287first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4288they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4289@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4290@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4291
8f1732fc
AB
4292When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4293is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4294immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4295@smallexample
4296*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4297@end smallexample
4298@noindent
4299will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4300@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4301from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4302exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4303could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4304@smallexample
4305*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4306@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4307@noindent
4308Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4309before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4310all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4311@smallexample
4312EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4313@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4314
252b5132
RH
4315You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4316You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4317needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4318@smallexample
4319data.o(.data)
4320@end smallexample
4321
ae17ab41
CM
4322To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4323of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4324
4325Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4326
4327@smallexample
4328@group
4329SECTIONS @{
4330 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4331 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4332@}
4333@end group
4334@end smallexample
4335
4336In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4337input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4338@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4339@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4340whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4341
967928e9
AM
4342You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4343matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4344with no whitespace around the colon.
4345
4346@table @samp
4347@item archive:file
4348matches file within archive
4349@item archive:
4350matches the whole archive
4351@item :file
4352matches file but not one in an archive
4353@end table
4354
4355Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4356wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4357single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4358@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4359within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4360also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4361other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4362from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4363command.
4364
252b5132
RH
4365If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4366the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4367commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4368@smallexample
4369data.o
4370@end smallexample
4371
967928e9
AM
4372When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4373and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4374characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4375name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4376did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4377though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4378@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4379the archive search path.
4380
4381@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4382@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4383@cindex input section wildcards
4384@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4385@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4386@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4387In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4388name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4389
4390The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4391pattern for the file name.
4392
4393The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4394
4395@table @samp
4396@item *
4397matches any number of characters
4398@item ?
4399matches any single character
4400@item [@var{chars}]
4401matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4402character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4403@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4404@item \
4405quotes the following character
4406@end table
4407
4408When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4409will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4410Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4411exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4412@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4413a @samp{/} character.
4414
4415File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4416specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4417does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4418
4419If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4420appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4421will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4422sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4423@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4424@smallexample
4425.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4426.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4427@end smallexample
4428
bcaa7b3e 4429@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4430Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4431in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4432this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4433pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4434@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4435into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4436
bcaa7b3e
L
4437@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4438@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4439difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4440descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4441Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4442reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4443
02ecc8e9
L
4444@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4445@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4446difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4447ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4448encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4449
bcaa7b3e
L
4450@cindex SORT
4451@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4452
4453When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4454can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4455
4456@enumerate
4457@item
4458@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4459It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4460sections have the same name.
4461@item
4462@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4463It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4464sections have the same alignment.
4465@item
c0065db7 4466@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4467treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4468@item
4469@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4470is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4471@item
4472All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4473@end enumerate
4474
4475When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4476section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4477takes precedence over the command line option.
4478
4479If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4480command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4481treated as nested sorting command.
4482
4483@enumerate
4484@item
4485@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4486@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4487@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4488@item
4489@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4490@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4491@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4492@end enumerate
4493
4494If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4495command line option will be ignored.
4496
eda680f8
L
4497@cindex SORT_NONE
4498@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4499section sorting option.
4500
252b5132
RH
4501If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4502@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4503precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4504
4505This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4506files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4507sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4508The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4509with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4510linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4511@smallexample
4512@group
4513SECTIONS @{
4514 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4515 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4516 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4517 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4518@}
4519@end group
4520@end smallexample
4521
4522@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4523@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4524@cindex common symbol placement
4525@cindex uninitialized data placement
4526A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4527file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4528linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4529named @samp{COMMON}.
4530
4531You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4532other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4533particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4534input files are placed in another section.
4535
4536In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4537@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4538@smallexample
4539.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4540@end smallexample
4541
4542@cindex scommon section
4543@cindex small common symbols
4544Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4545example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4546symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4547different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4548the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4549symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4550to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4551locations.
4552
4553@cindex [COMMON]
4554You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4555notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4556@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4557
4558@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4559@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4560@cindex KEEP
4561@cindex garbage collection
4562When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4563it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4564This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4565with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4566@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4567
4568@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4569@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4570The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4571to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4572start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4573@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4574follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4575@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4576@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4577All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4578files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4579
4580@smallexample
4581@group
4582SECTIONS @{
4583 outputa 0x10000 :
4584 @{
4585 all.o
4586 foo.o (.input1)
4587 @}
36f63dca
NC
4588@end group
4589@group
252b5132
RH
4590 outputb :
4591 @{
4592 foo.o (.input2)
4593 foo1.o (.input1)
4594 @}
36f63dca
NC
4595@end group
4596@group
252b5132
RH
4597 outputc :
4598 @{
4599 *(.input1)
4600 *(.input2)
4601 @}
4602@}
4603@end group
a1ab1d2a 4604@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4605
4606@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4607@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4608@cindex data
4609@cindex section data
4610@cindex output section data
4611@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4612@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4613@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4614@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4615@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4616You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4617@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4618an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4619parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4620value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4621counter.
4622
4623The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4624store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4625bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4626stored.
4627
4628For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4629of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4630@smallexample
4631BYTE(1)
4632LONG(addr)
4633@end smallexample
4634
4635When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4636same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4637target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4638@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4639@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4640
4641If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4642which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4643When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4644true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4645endianness of the first input object file.
4646
36f63dca 4647Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4648between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4649@smallexample
4650SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4651@end smallexample
4652whereas this will work:
4653@smallexample
4654SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4655@end smallexample
4656
252b5132
RH
4657@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4658@cindex holes, filling
4659@cindex unspecified memory
4660You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4661current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4662otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4663gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4664with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4665necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4666point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4667than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4668different parts of an output section.
4669
4670This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4671value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4672@smallexample
563e308f 4673FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4674@end smallexample
4675
4676The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4677section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4678part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4679entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4680precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4681expression.
252b5132
RH
4682
4683@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4684@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4685There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4686commands.
4687
4688@table @code
4689@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4690@cindex input filename symbols
4691@cindex filename symbols
4692@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4693The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4694The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4695file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4696the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4697
4698This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4699normally used for any other object file format.
4700
4701@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4702@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4703@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4704@item CONSTRUCTORS
4705When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4706unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4707destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4708arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4709automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4710For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4711linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4712@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4713ignored for other object file formats.
4714
4715The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4716constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4717Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4718the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4719first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4720of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4721compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4722formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4723@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4724the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4725destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4726@code{exit}.
4727
4728For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4729arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4730addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4731and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4732linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4733runtime code expects to see.
4734
4735@smallexample
4736 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4737 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4738 *(.ctors)
4739 LONG(0)
4740 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4741 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4742 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4743 *(.dtors)
4744 LONG(0)
4745 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4746@end smallexample
4747
4748If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4749which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4750are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4751are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4752command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4753@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4754@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4755@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4756
4757Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4758and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4759need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4760scripts.
4761
4762@end table
4763
4764@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4765@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4766@cindex discarding sections
4767@cindex sections, discarding
4768@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4769The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4770This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4771may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4772@smallexample
49c13adb 4773.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4774@end smallexample
4775@noindent
4776will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4777@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4778sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4779space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4780too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4781space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4782@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4783@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4784This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4785
a0976ea4 4786The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4787on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4788symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4789the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4790section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4791
4792@cindex /DISCARD/
4793The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4794input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4795section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4796
4797@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4798@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4799@cindex output section attributes
4800We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4801like this:
0c71d759 4802
252b5132 4803@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4804@group
7e7d5768 4805@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4806 [AT(@var{lma})]
4807 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4808 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4809 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4810 @{
4811 @var{output-section-command}
4812 @var{output-section-command}
4813 @dots{}
562d3460 4814 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4815@end group
4816@end smallexample
0c71d759 4817
252b5132
RH
4818We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4819@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4820remaining section attributes.
4821
a1ab1d2a 4822@menu
252b5132
RH
4823* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4824* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4825* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4826* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4827* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4828* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4829* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4830* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4831@end menu
4832
4833@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4834@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4835Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4836parentheses. The following types are defined:
4837
4838@table @code
4839@item NOLOAD
4840The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4841loaded into memory when the program is run.
4842@item DSECT
4843@itemx COPY
4844@itemx INFO
4845@itemx OVERLAY
4846These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4847rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4848marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4849section when the program is run.
4850@end table
4851
4852@kindex NOLOAD
4853@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4854@cindex loading, preventing
4855The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4856the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4857the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4858@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4859need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4860@smallexample
4861@group
4862SECTIONS @{
4863 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4864 @dots{}
4865@}
4866@end group
4867@end smallexample
4868
4869@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4870@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4871@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4872@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4873@cindex load address
4874@cindex section load address
4875Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4876@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4877@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4878specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4879address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4880
ea5cae92
NC
4881The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4882specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4883takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4884load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4885region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4886
4887If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4888section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4889load address:
4890
4891@itemize @bullet
4892@item
4893If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4894the LMA address as well.
4895
4896@item
4897If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4898
4899@item
4900Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4901with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4902section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4903VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4904the last section in the located region.
4905
4906@item
4907If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4908that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4909
4910@item
4911If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4912section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4913@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4914
4915@cindex ROM initialized data
4916@cindex initialized data in ROM
4917This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4918example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4919called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4920@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4921even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4922uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4923defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4924counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4925
4926@smallexample
4927@group
4928SECTIONS
4929 @{
4930 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4931 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4932 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4933 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4934 .bss 0x3000 :
4935 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4936@}
4937@end group
4938@end smallexample
4939
4940The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4941this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4942the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4943how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4944script.
4945
4946@smallexample
4947@group
4948extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4949char *src = &_etext;
4950char *dst = &_data;
4951
ea5cae92
NC
4952/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4953while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4954 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4955
ea5cae92 4956/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4957for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4958 *dst = 0;
4959@end group
4960@end smallexample
4961
bbf115d3
L
4962@node Forced Output Alignment
4963@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4964@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4965@cindex forcing output section alignment
4966@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4967You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4968alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4969intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4970
7e7d5768
AM
4971@node Forced Input Alignment
4972@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4973@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4974@cindex forcing input section alignment
4975@cindex input section alignment
4976You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4977SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4978sections, whether larger or smaller.
4979
0c71d759
NC
4980@node Output Section Constraint
4981@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4982@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4983@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4984@cindex constraints on output sections
4985You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4986of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4987read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4988@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4989
252b5132 4990@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4991@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4992@kindex >@var{region}
4993@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4994@cindex memory regions and sections
4995You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4996using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4997
4998Here is a simple example:
4999@smallexample
5000@group
5001MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5002SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5003@end group
5004@end smallexample
5005
5006@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5007@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5008@kindex :@var{phdr}
5009@cindex section, assigning to program header
5010@cindex program headers and sections
5011You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5012using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5013one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5014assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5015@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5016linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5017
5018Here is a simple example:
5019@smallexample
5020@group
5021PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5022SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5023@end group
5024@end smallexample
5025
5026@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5027@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5028@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5029@cindex section fill pattern
5030@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5031You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5032@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5033(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5034within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5035alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5036necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5037of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5038an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5039fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5040other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5041pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5042expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5043
5044You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5045output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5046
5047Here is a simple example:
5048@smallexample
5049@group
563e308f 5050SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5051@end group
5052@end smallexample
5053
5054@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5055@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5056@kindex OVERLAY
5057@cindex overlays
5058An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5059are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5060the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5061copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5062required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5063can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5064than another.
5065
5066Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5067@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5068output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5069command is as follows:
5070@smallexample
5071@group
5072OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5073 @{
5074 @var{secname1}
5075 @{
5076 @var{output-section-command}
5077 @var{output-section-command}
5078 @dots{}
5079 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5080 @var{secname2}
5081 @{
5082 @var{output-section-command}
5083 @var{output-section-command}
5084 @dots{}
5085 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5086 @dots{}
abc9061b 5087 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5088@end group
5089@end smallexample
5090
5091Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5092section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5093section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5094those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5095except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5096sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5097
abc9061b
CC
5098The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5099the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5100
252b5132
RH
5101The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5102addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5103memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5104whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5105and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5106and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5107
56dd11f0
NC
5108If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5109references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5110the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5111sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5112@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5113
5114For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5115provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5116defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5117@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5118the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5119within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5120symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5121
5122At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5123the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5124
5125Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5126@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5127@smallexample
5128@group
5129 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5130 @{
5131 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5132 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5133 @}
5134@end group
5135@end smallexample
5136@noindent
5137This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5138address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5139@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5140following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5141@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5142@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5143
5144C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5145like the following.
5146
5147@smallexample
5148@group
5149 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5150 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5151 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5152@end group
5153@end smallexample
5154
5155Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5156everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5157example could have been written identically as follows.
5158
5159@smallexample
5160@group
5161 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5162 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5163 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5164 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5165 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5166 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5167 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5168@end group
5169@end smallexample
5170
5171@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5172@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5173@kindex MEMORY
5174@cindex memory regions
5175@cindex regions of memory
5176@cindex allocating memory
5177@cindex discontinuous memory
5178The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5179memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5180
5181The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5182memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5183may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5184can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5185set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5186regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5187around to fit into the available regions.
5188
127fcdff
AB
5189A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5190however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5191specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5192@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5193@smallexample
5194@group
a1ab1d2a 5195MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5196 @{
5197 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5198 @dots{}
5199 @}
5200@end group
5201@end smallexample
5202
5203The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5204region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5205Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5206with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5207must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5208add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5209command.
252b5132
RH
5210
5211@cindex memory region attributes
5212The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5213whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5214not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5215@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5216section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5217the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5218them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5219
5220The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5221@table @samp
5222@item R
5223Read-only section
5224@item W
5225Read/write section
5226@item X
5227Executable section
5228@item A
5229Allocatable section
5230@item I
5231Initialized section
5232@item L
5233Same as @samp{I}
5234@item !
c09e9a8c 5235Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5236@end table
5237
5238If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5239@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5240attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5241in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5242attributes.
5243
5244@kindex ORIGIN =
5245@kindex o =
5246@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5247The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5248the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5249cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5250abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5251@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5252
5253@kindex LENGTH =
5254@kindex len =
5255@kindex l =
5256The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5257region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5258be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5259@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5260
5261In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5262available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5263and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5264linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5265is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5266or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5267explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5268region.
5269
5270@smallexample
5271@group
a1ab1d2a 5272MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5273 @{
5274 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5275 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5276 @}
5277@end group
5278@end smallexample
5279
5280Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5281specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5282@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5283a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5284output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5285was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5286the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5287output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5288region, the linker will issue an error message.
5289
3ec57632 5290It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5291expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5292@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5293
5294@smallexample
5295@group
c0065db7 5296 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5297@end group
5298@end smallexample
5299
252b5132
RH
5300@node PHDRS
5301@section PHDRS Command
5302@kindex PHDRS
5303@cindex program headers
5304@cindex ELF program headers
5305@cindex program segments
5306@cindex segments, ELF
5307The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5308@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5309loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5310program with the @samp{-p} option.
5311
5312When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5313reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5314program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5315This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5316interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5317
5318The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5319in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5320precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5321the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5322not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5323
5324The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5325generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5326ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5327
5328This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5329@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5330
5331@smallexample
5332@group
5333PHDRS
5334@{
5335 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5336 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5337@}
5338@end group
5339@end smallexample
5340
5341The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5342of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5343header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5344with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5345must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5346is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5347
5348Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5349system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5350specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5351sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5352attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5353Section Phdr}.
5354
5355It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5356merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5357repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5358contain the section.
5359
5360If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5361then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5362not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5363convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5364placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5365default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5366segment at all.
5367
5368@kindex FILEHDR
5369@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5370You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5371the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5372The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5373file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5374include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5375segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5376these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5377
5378The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5379value of the keyword.
5380
5381@table @asis
5382@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5383Indicates an unused program header.
5384
5385@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5386Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5387the file.
5388
5389@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5390Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5391
5392@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5393Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5394found.
5395
5396@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5397Indicates a segment holding note information.
5398
5399@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5400A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5401ABI.
5402
5403@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5404Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5405
1a9ccd70
NC
5406@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5407Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5408
252b5132
RH
5409@item @var{expression}
5410An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5411be used for types not defined above.
5412@end table
5413
5414You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5415in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5416@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5417Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5418output section attribute.
5419
5420The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5421which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5422explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5423an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5424header.
5425
5426Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5427headers used on a native ELF system.
5428
5429@example
5430@group
5431PHDRS
5432@{
5433 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5434 interp PT_INTERP ;
5435 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5436 data PT_LOAD ;
5437 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5438@}
5439
5440SECTIONS
5441@{
5442 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5443 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5444 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5445 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5446 @dots{}
5447 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5448 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5449 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5450 @dots{}
5451@}
5452@end group
5453@end example
5454
5455@node VERSION
5456@section VERSION Command
5457@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5458@cindex symbol versions
5459@cindex version script
5460@cindex versions of symbols
5461The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5462only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5463symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5464a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5465shared library.
5466
5467You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5468you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5469also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5470
5471The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5472@smallexample
5473VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5474@end smallexample
5475
5476The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5477Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5478version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5479version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5480version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5481scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5482library.
5483
5484The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5485examples.
5486
5487@smallexample
5488VERS_1.1 @{
5489 global:
5490 foo1;
5491 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5492 old*;
5493 original*;
5494 new*;
252b5132
RH
5495@};
5496
5497VERS_1.2 @{
5498 foo2;
5499@} VERS_1.1;
5500
5501VERS_2.0 @{
5502 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5503 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5504 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5505 "f(int, double)";
5506 @};
252b5132
RH
5507@} VERS_1.2;
5508@end smallexample
5509
5510This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5511version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5512The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5513a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5514of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5515symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5516is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5517in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5518However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5519name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5520
5521Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5522depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5523to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5524
5525Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5526depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5527and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5528
5529When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5530specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5531unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5532unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5533somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5534wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5535wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5536set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5537ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5538
5539The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5540they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5541could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5542However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5543
0f6bf451 5544Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5545in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5546symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5547won't.
5548
5549@smallexample
7c9c73be 5550@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5551@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5552
252b5132
RH
5553When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5554symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5555requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5556shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5557loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5558linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5559application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5560way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5561all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5562search for each symbol reference.
5563
5564The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5565doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5566that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5567functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5568the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5569required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5570that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5571versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5572the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5573
5574There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5575first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5576source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5577script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5578maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5579@smallexample
5580__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5581@end smallexample
5582@noindent
5583in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5584be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5585The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5586@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5587takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5588
5589The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5590function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5591an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5592version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5593linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5594
5595To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5596source file. Here is an example:
5597
5598@smallexample
5599__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5600__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5601__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5602__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5603@end smallexample
5604
5605In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5606unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5607example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5608@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5609
5610When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5611some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5612this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5613@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5614declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5615you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5616
5617If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5618within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5619(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5620specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5621
cb840a31
L
5622You can also specify the language in the version script:
5623
5624@smallexample
5625VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5626@end smallexample
5627
c0065db7 5628The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5629The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5630demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5631patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5632@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5633
86043bbb
MM
5634Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5635described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5636or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5637the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5638whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5639cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5640might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5641should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5642expect when you upgrade.
5643
252b5132
RH
5644@node Expressions
5645@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5646@cindex expressions
5647@cindex arithmetic
5648The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5649that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5650expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5651host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5652
5653You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5654
5655The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5656expressions.
5657
5658@menu
5659* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5660* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5661* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5662* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5663* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5664* Operators:: Operators
5665* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5666* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5667* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5668@end menu
5669
5670@node Constants
5671@subsection Constants
5672@cindex integer notation
5673@cindex constants in linker scripts
5674All constants are integers.
5675
5676As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5677octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5678hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5679@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5680@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5681value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5682
5683@cindex scaled integers
5684@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5685@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5686@cindex suffixes for integers
5687@cindex integer suffixes
5688In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5689constant by
5690@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5691@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5692@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5693@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5694@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5695@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5696@tex
5697${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5698@end tex
5699@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5700respectively. For example, the following
5701all refer to the same quantity:
5702
252b5132 5703@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5704_fourk_1 = 4K;
5705_fourk_2 = 4096;
5706_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5707_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5708@end smallexample
5709
8a308ae8
NC
5710Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5711conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5712
0c71d759
NC
5713@node Symbolic Constants
5714@subsection Symbolic Constants
5715@cindex symbolic constants
5716@kindex CONSTANT
5717It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5718the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5719
5720@table @code
5721@item MAXPAGESIZE
5722@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5723The target's maximum page size.
5724
5725@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5726@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5727The target's default page size.
5728@end table
5729
5730So for example:
5731
5732@smallexample
9d5777a3 5733 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5734@end smallexample
5735
5736will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5737supported by the target.
5738
252b5132
RH
5739@node Symbols
5740@subsection Symbol Names
5741@cindex symbol names
5742@cindex names
5743@cindex quoted symbol names
5744@kindex "
5745Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5746and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5747Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5748specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5749keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5750@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5751"SECTION" = 9;
5752"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5753@end smallexample
5754
5755Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5756to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5757whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5758
ecca9871
L
5759@node Orphan Sections
5760@subsection Orphan Sections
5761@cindex orphan
5762Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5763are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5764script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5765output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5766placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5767attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5768same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5769If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5770at the end of the file.
5771
5772For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5773well as section flag.
5774
c005eb9e
AB
5775The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5776(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5777output sections an orphan is placed in.
5778
41911f68 5779If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5780the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5781__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5782section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5783orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5784representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5785character.
5786
252b5132
RH
5787@node Location Counter
5788@subsection The Location Counter
5789@kindex .
5790@cindex dot
5791@cindex location counter
5792@cindex current output location
5793The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5794current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5795location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5796within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5797anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5798
5799@cindex holes
5800Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5801moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5802location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5803and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5804doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5805
5806@smallexample
5807SECTIONS
5808@{
5809 output :
5810 @{
5811 file1(.text)
5812 . = . + 1000;
5813 file2(.text)
5814 . += 1000;
5815 file3(.text)
563e308f 5816 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5817@}
5818@end smallexample
5819@noindent
5820In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5821located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5822followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5823@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5824@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5825specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5826
5c6bbab8
NC
5827@cindex dot inside sections
5828Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5829current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5830statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5831absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5832however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5833not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5834
5835@smallexample
5836SECTIONS
5837@{
5838 . = 0x100
5839 .text: @{
5840 *(.text)
5841 . = 0x200
5842 @}
5843 . = 0x500
5844 .data: @{
5845 *(.data)
5846 . += 0x600
5847 @}
5848@}
5849@end smallexample
5850
5851The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5852and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5853the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5854much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5855move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5856and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5857the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5858the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5859
b5666f2f
AM
5860@cindex dot outside sections
5861Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5862output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5863needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5864
5865@smallexample
5866SECTIONS
5867@{
5868 start_of_text = . ;
5869 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5870 end_of_text = . ;
5871
5872 start_of_data = . ;
5873 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5874 end_of_data = . ;
5875@}
5876@end smallexample
5877
5878If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5879not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5880between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5881should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5882blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5883the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5884sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5885statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5886special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5887place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5888as follows:
5889
5890@smallexample
5891SECTIONS
5892@{
5893 start_of_text = . ;
5894 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5895 end_of_text = . ;
5896
5897 start_of_data = . ;
5898 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5899 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5900 end_of_data = . ;
5901@}
5902@end smallexample
5903
5904This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5905@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5906placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5907assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5908a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5909section. So you could write:
5910
5911@smallexample
5912SECTIONS
5913@{
5914 start_of_text = . ;
5915 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5916 end_of_text = . ;
5917
5918 . = . ;
5919 start_of_data = . ;
5920 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5921 end_of_data = . ;
5922@}
5923@end smallexample
5924
5925Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5926@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5927
252b5132
RH
5928@need 2000
5929@node Operators
5930@subsection Operators
5931@cindex operators for arithmetic
5932@cindex arithmetic operators
5933@cindex precedence in expressions
5934The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5935the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5936@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5937@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5938@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5939@smallexample
5940precedence associativity Operators Notes
5941(highest)
59421 left ! - ~ (1)
59432 left * / %
59443 left + -
59454 left >> <<
59465 left == != > < <= >=
59476 left &
59487 left |
59498 left &&
59509 left ||
595110 right ? :
595211 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5953(lowest)
5954@end smallexample
5955Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5956(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5957(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5958@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5959@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5960@tex
5961\vskip \baselineskip
5962%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5963\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5964\hrule
5965\halign
5966{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5967height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5968&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5969height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5970\noalign{\hrule}
5971height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5972&highest&&&&&\cr
5973% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5974&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5975&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5976&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5977&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5978&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5979&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5980&7&&left&&|&\cr
5981&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5982&9&&left&&||&\cr
5983&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5984&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5985&lowest&&&&&\cr
5986height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5987\hrule}
5988@end tex
5989@iftex
5990{
5991@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5992@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5993@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5994}
5995@end iftex
5996@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5997
5998@node Evaluation
5999@subsection Evaluation
6000@cindex lazy evaluation
6001@cindex expression evaluation order
6002The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6003an expression when absolutely necessary.
6004
6005The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6006address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6007regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6008as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6009
6010However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6011until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6012other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6013for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6014
6015The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6016assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6017allocation.
6018
6019Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6020@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6021
6022If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6023available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6024following
6025@smallexample
6026@group
6027SECTIONS
6028 @{
a1ab1d2a 6029 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6030 @{ *(.text) @}
6031 @}
6032@end group
6033@end smallexample
6034@noindent
6035will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6036address}.
6037
6038@node Expression Section
6039@subsection The Section of an Expression
6040@cindex expression sections
6041@cindex absolute expressions
6042@cindex relative expressions
6043@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6044@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6045@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6046Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6047relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6048using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6049value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6050symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6051operations.
6052
abf4be64
AM
6053Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6054section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6055address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6056@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6057functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6058One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6059(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6060differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6061versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6062section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6063Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6064absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6065given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6066everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6067
6068In the following simple example,
252b5132 6069
7542af2a
AM
6070@smallexample
6071@group
6072SECTIONS
6073 @{
6074 . = 0x100;
6075 __executable_start = 0x100;
6076 .data :
6077 @{
6078 . = 0x10;
6079 __data_start = 0x10;
6080 *(.data)
6081 @}
6082 @dots{}
6083 @}
6084@end group
6085@end smallexample
252b5132 6086
7542af2a
AM
6087both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6088address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6089@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6090section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6091
5c3049d2
AM
6092For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6093addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6094
6095@itemize @bullet
6096@item
c05f749e
AM
6097Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6098operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6099absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6100@item
7542af2a
AM
6101Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6102relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6103and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6104@item
c05f749e
AM
6105Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6106in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6107address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6108before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6109@end itemize
6110
6111The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6112
6113@itemize @bullet
6114@item
6115An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6116@item
6117The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6118@item
9bc8bb33 6119The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6120relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6121(after above conversions) is also a number when
6122@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6123but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6124@item
6125The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6126relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6127section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6128@item
6129The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6130conversions) is an absolute address.
6131@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6132
6133You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6134to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6135create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6136section @samp{.data}:
6137@smallexample
6138SECTIONS
6139 @{
6140 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6141 @}
6142@end smallexample
6143@noindent
6144If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6145@samp{.data} section.
6146
7542af2a
AM
6147Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6148particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6149
252b5132
RH
6150@node Builtin Functions
6151@subsection Builtin Functions
6152@cindex functions in expressions
6153The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6154use in linker script expressions.
6155
6156@table @code
6157@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6158@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6159@cindex expression, absolute
6160Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6161of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6162value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6163normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6164
6165@item ADDR(@var{section})
6166@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6167@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6168Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6169script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6170the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6171@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6172@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6173the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6174@smallexample
6175@group
6176SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6177 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6178 @{
252b5132
RH
6179 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6180 @dots{}
6181 @}
6182 .output :
6183 @{
6184 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6185 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6186 @}
6187@dots{} @}
6188@end group
6189@end smallexample
6190
876f4090
NS
6191@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6192@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6193@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6194@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6195@cindex round up location counter
6196@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6197@cindex round up expression
6198@cindex align expression
6199Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6200to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6201doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6202arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6203expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6204equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6205
6206Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6207next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6208variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6209input sections:
252b5132
RH
6210@smallexample
6211@group
6212SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6213 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6214 *(.data)
6215 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6216 @}
6217@dots{} @}
6218@end group
6219@end smallexample
6220@noindent
6221The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6222a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6223a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6224of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6225
6226The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6227
362c1d1a
NS
6228@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6229@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6230@cindex section alignment
6231Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6232been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6233evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6234the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6235value in that section.
6236@smallexample
6237@group
6238SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6239 .output @{
6240 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6241 @dots{}
6242 @}
6243@dots{} @}
6244@end group
6245@end smallexample
6246
252b5132
RH
6247@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6248@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6249This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6250scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6251section.
6252
2d20f7bf
JJ
6253@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6254@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6255This is equivalent to either
6256@smallexample
6257(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6258@end smallexample
6259or
6260@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6261(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6262 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6263@end smallexample
6264@noindent
6265depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6266for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6267@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6268If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6269memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6270bytes in the on-disk file.
6271
6272This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6273any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6274@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6275be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6276working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6277
6278@noindent
6279Example:
6280@smallexample
6281 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6282@end smallexample
6283
6284@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6285@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6286This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6287evaluation purposes.
6288
6289@smallexample
6290 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6291@end smallexample
6292
a4f5ad88
JJ
6293@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6294@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6295This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6296@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6297When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6298does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6299@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6300boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6301it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6302@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6303padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6304section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6305
6306@smallexample
6307 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6308@end smallexample
6309
252b5132
RH
6310@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6311@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6312@cindex symbol defaults
6313Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6314defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6315return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6316default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6317shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6318the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6319existed, its value is preserved:
6320
6321@smallexample
6322@group
6323SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6324 .text : @{
6325 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6326 @dots{}
6327 @}
6328 @dots{}
6329@}
6330@end group
6331@end smallexample
6332
3ec57632
NC
6333@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6334@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6335Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6336
252b5132
RH
6337@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6338@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6339@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6340Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6341Section LMA}).
6342
2e53f7d6
NC
6343@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6344@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6345Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6346@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6347
252b5132
RH
6348@kindex MAX
6349@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6350Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6351
6352@kindex MIN
6353@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6354Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6355
6356@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6357@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6358@cindex unallocated address, next
6359Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6360This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6361use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6362output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6363
3ec57632
NC
6364@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6365@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6366Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6367
ba916c8a
MM
6368@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6369@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6370Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6371value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6372@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6373will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6374can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6375``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6376name.
6377
252b5132
RH
6378@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6379@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6380@cindex section size
6381Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6382been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6383evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6384@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6385@smallexample
6386@group
6387SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6388 .output @{
6389 .start = . ;
6390 @dots{}
6391 .end = . ;
6392 @}
6393 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6394 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6395@dots{} @}
6396@end group
6397@end smallexample
6398
6399@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6400@itemx sizeof_headers
6401@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6402@cindex header size
6403Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6404information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6405this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6406choose, to facilitate paging.
6407
6408@cindex not enough room for program headers
6409@cindex program headers, not enough room
6410When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6411@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6412number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6413addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6414additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6415room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6416the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6417script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6418you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6419command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6420@end table
6421
6422@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6423@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6424@cindex implicit linker scripts
6425If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6426an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6427linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6428linker will report an error.
6429
6430An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6431
6432Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6433assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6434commands.
6435
6436Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6437at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6438read. This can affect archive searching.
6439
6440@ifset GENERIC
6441@node Machine Dependent
6442@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6443
6444@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6445@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6446sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6447functionality are not listed.
6448
6449@menu
36f63dca
NC
6450@ifset H8300
6451* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6452@end ifset
6453@ifset I960
6454* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6455@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6456@ifset M68HC11
6457* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6458@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6459@ifset ARM
6460* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6461@end ifset
6462@ifset HPPA
6463* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6464@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6465@ifset M68K
6466* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6467@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6468@ifset MIPS
6469* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6470@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6471@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6472* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6473@end ifset
2469cfa2 6474@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6475* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6476@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6477@ifset NDS32
6478* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6479@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6480@ifset NIOSII
6481* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6482@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6483@ifset POWERPC
6484* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6485@end ifset
6486@ifset POWERPC64
6487* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6488@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6489@ifset SPU
6490* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6491@end ifset
74459f0e 6492@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6493* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6494@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6495@ifset WIN32
6496* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6497@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6498@ifset XTENSA
6499* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6500@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6501@end menu
6502@end ifset
6503
252b5132
RH
6504@ifset H8300
6505@ifclear GENERIC
6506@raisesections
6507@end ifclear
6508
6509@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6510@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6511
6512@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6513For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6514you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6515
6516@table @emph
6517@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6518@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6519@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6520targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6521program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6522respectively.
6523
6524@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6525@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6526@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6527@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6528sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6529page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6530(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6531@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6532top page of memory).
1502569c 6533
81f5558e
NC
6534@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6535indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6536displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6537the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6538@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6539whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6540range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6541
1502569c 6542@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6543@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6544biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6545which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6546page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6547(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6548@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6549the top page of memory).
6550
6551@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6552@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
655332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6554changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6555(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6556@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6557the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6558@end table
6559
6560@ifclear GENERIC
6561@lowersections
6562@end ifclear
6563@end ifset
6564
36f63dca 6565@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6566@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6567@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6568@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6569@node Renesas
6570@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6571
c2dcd04e
NC
6572@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6573H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6574options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6575@end ifset
6576@end ifclear
6577
6578@ifset I960
6579@ifclear GENERIC
6580@raisesections
6581@end ifclear
6582
6583@node i960
6584@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6585
6586@cindex i960 support
6587
6588You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6589specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6590family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6591incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6592linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6593libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6594search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6595
6596For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6597well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6598paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6599the names
6600
6601@smallexample
6602@group
6603try
6604libtry.a
6605tryca
6606libtryca.a
6607@end group
6608@end smallexample
6609
6610@noindent
6611The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6612two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6613
6614You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6615the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6616use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6617specifies a library.
6618
6619@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6620@cindex relaxing on i960
6621@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6622you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6623@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6624them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6625instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6626instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6627target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6628not itself call any subroutines).
6629
6630@ifclear GENERIC
6631@lowersections
6632@end ifclear
6633@end ifset
6634
6635@ifset ARM
6636@ifclear GENERIC
6637@raisesections
6638@end ifclear
6639
93fd0973
SC
6640@ifset M68HC11
6641@ifclear GENERIC
6642@raisesections
6643@end ifclear
6644
6645@node M68HC11/68HC12
6646@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6647
6648@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6649
6650@subsection Linker Relaxation
6651
6652For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6653optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6654
6655@table @emph
6656@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6657@item relaxing address modes
6658@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6659targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6660program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6661respectively.
6662
6663@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6664transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6665page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6666
6667@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6668When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6669of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6670addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6671@code{bset} instructions.
6672
6673@end table
6674
6675@subsection Trampoline Generation
6676
6677@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6678@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6679For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6680call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6681will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6682trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6683case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6684point to the function trampoline.
6685
6686@ifclear GENERIC
6687@lowersections
6688@end ifclear
6689@end ifset
6690
36f63dca 6691@node ARM
3674e28a 6692@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6693
6694@cindex ARM interworking support
6695@kindex --support-old-code
6696For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6697between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6698been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6699line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6700libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6701option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6702given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6703which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6704the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6705non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6706
6707@cindex thumb entry point
6708@cindex entry point, thumb
6709@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6710The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6711@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6712But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6713branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6714executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6715
ce11ba6c
KT
6716@cindex PE import table prefixing
6717@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6718The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6719the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6720element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6721import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6722
e489d0ae
PB
6723@cindex BE8
6724@kindex --be8
6725The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6726executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6727objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6728option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6729little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6730
3674e28a
PB
6731@cindex TARGET1
6732@kindex --target1-rel
6733@kindex --target1-abs
6734The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6735@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6736or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6737and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6738
6739@cindex TARGET2
6740@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6741The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6742@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6743meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6744@table @samp
6745@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6746@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6747@item abs
6748@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6749@item got-rel
6750@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6751@end table
6752
319850b4
JB
6753@cindex FIX_V4BX
6754@kindex --fix-v4bx
6755The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6756specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6757interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6758also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6759
6760In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6761linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6762@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6763
6764In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6765relocations are ignored.
6766
845b51d6
PB
6767@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6768@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6769Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6770relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6771
6772@smallexample
6773TST rM, #1
6774MOVEQ PC, rM
6775BX Rn
6776@end smallexample
6777
6778This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6779and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6780condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6781
33bfe774
JB
6782@cindex USE_BLX
6783@kindex --use-blx
6784The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6785BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6786situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6787code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6788each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6789
6790This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6791specify it if you are using that target.
6792
c6dd86c6
JB
6793@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6794@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6795The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6796bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6797instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6798to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6799the support code can read the intended values.
6800
6801The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6802intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6803and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6804intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6805full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6806you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6807
6808If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6809enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6810@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6811mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6812vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6813@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6814
6815If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6816potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6817such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6818first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6819instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6820the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6821are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6822
2de70689
MGD
6823@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6824@kindex --fix-arm1176
6825@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6826The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6827in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6828are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6829unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6830
9d5777a3 6831Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6832Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6833http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6834
a504d23a
LA
6835@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6836@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6837
6838The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6839workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6840the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6841off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6842the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6843core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6844integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6845VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6846
6847The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6848necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6849
6850The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6851@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6852STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6853linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6854@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6855
6856If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6857potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6858such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6859replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6860branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6861then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6862
6863The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6864the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6865
6866The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6867they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6868there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6869occurs.
6870
6871The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6872PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6873large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6874cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6875occurs.
6876
bf21ed78
MS
6877@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6878@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6879The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6880warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6881enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6882linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6883using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6884not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6885
6886@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6887@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6888The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6889warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6890@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6891linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6892using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6893
726150b7
NC
6894@cindex PIC_VENEER
6895@kindex --pic-veneer
6896The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6897ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6898is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6899@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6900
6901@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6902@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6903The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6904code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6905perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6906placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6907controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6908The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6909duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6910group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6911code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6912where they should be placed.
6913
6914The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6915@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6916placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6917branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6918placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6919value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6920exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6921A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6922linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6923from the input sections.
6924
6925The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6926@samp{N = +1}.
6927
1a51c1a4
NC
6928Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6929only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6930otherwise.
6931
1db37fe6
YG
6932@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6933@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6934@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6935The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6936
6937The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6938
68fcca92
JW
6939@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6940@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6941@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6942The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6943
6944Please contact ARM for further details.
6945
1db37fe6
YG
6946@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6947@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6948@cindex Merging exidx entries
6949The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6950
6951@kindex --long-plt
6952@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6953The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6954which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6955entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6956
1f56df9d
JW
6957@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6958@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6959The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6960link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6961
4ba2ef8f
TP
6962@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6963All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6964Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6965@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6966veneers in memory.
6967
54ddd295
TP
6968@kindex --cmse-implib
6969@cindex Secure gateway import library
6970The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6971specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6972secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6973executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6974
0955507f
TP
6975@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6976@cindex Input import library
6977The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6978must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6979given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6980in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6981@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6982library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6983library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6984for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6985specified.
6986
36f63dca
NC
6987@ifclear GENERIC
6988@lowersections
6989@end ifclear
6990@end ifset
6991
6992@ifset HPPA
6993@ifclear GENERIC
6994@raisesections
6995@end ifclear
6996
6997@node HPPA ELF32
6998@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6999@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7000@kindex --multi-subspace
7001When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7002import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7003The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7004stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7005multiple sub-spaces.
7006
7007@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7008@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7009Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7010stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7011@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7012sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7013a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7014the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7015conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7016prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7017A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7018branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7019@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7020@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7021detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7022positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7023
7024Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7025single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7026create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7027large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7028
7029@ifclear GENERIC
7030@lowersections
7031@end ifclear
7032@end ifset
7033
7fb9f789
NC
7034@ifset M68K
7035@ifclear GENERIC
7036@raisesections
7037@end ifclear
7038
7039@node M68K
7040@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7041
7042@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7043@kindex --got=@var{type}
7044The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7045The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7046@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7047the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7048@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7049entries only at non-negative offsets.
7050@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7051entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7052support such GOTs.
7053@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7054output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7055file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7056files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7057
7058@ifclear GENERIC
7059@lowersections
7060@end ifclear
7061@end ifset
7062
833794fc
MR
7063@ifset MIPS
7064@ifclear GENERIC
7065@raisesections
7066@end ifclear
7067
7068@node MIPS
7069@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7070
7071@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7072@kindex --insn32
7073@kindex --no-insn32
7074The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7075microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7076in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7077used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7078or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7079including 16-bit ones where possible.
7080
8b10b0b3
MR
7081@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7082@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7083@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7084The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7085control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7086@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7087relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7088calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7089relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7090instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7091or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7092the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7093
833794fc
MR
7094@ifclear GENERIC
7095@lowersections
7096@end ifclear
7097@end ifset
7098
36f63dca
NC
7099@ifset MMIX
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@raisesections
7102@end ifclear
7103
7104@node MMIX
7105@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7106For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7107@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7108understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7109can translate between the two formats.
7110
7111There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7112Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7113registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7114equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7115@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7116global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7117this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7118symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7119
7a2de473
HPN
7120Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7121@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7122The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7123of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7124
7125Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7126are left out from an mmo file.
7127
7128@ifclear GENERIC
7129@lowersections
7130@end ifclear
7131@end ifset
7132
7133@ifset MSP430
7134@ifclear GENERIC
7135@raisesections
7136@end ifclear
7137
7138@node MSP430
7139@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7140For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7141will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7142just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7143
7144@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7145The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7146
7147@table @code
7148@item @samp{.vectors}
7149Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7150
7151@item @samp{.bootloader}
7152Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7153in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7154
7155@item @samp{.infomem}
7156Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7157this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7158
c0065db7 7159@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7160This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7161in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7162
7163@item @samp{.noinit}
7164Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7165
c0065db7 7166The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7167@end table
7168
7169@ifclear GENERIC
7170@lowersections
7171@end ifclear
7172@end ifset
7173
35c08157
KLC
7174@ifset NDS32
7175@ifclear GENERIC
7176@raisesections
7177@end ifclear
7178
7179@node NDS32
7180@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7181@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7182For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7183relaxes objects according to these options.
7184
7185@table @code
7186@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7187Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7188
7189@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7190Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7191
7192@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7193Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7194
7195@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7196Export the EX9 table after linking.
7197
7198@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7199Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7200
7201@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7202Update the existing EX9 table.
7203
7204@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7205Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7206
7207@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7208Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7209
7210@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7211Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7212
7213@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7214Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7215@end table
7216
7217@ifclear GENERIC
7218@lowersections
7219@end ifclear
7220@end ifset
7221
78058a5e
SL
7222@ifset NIOSII
7223@ifclear GENERIC
7224@raisesections
7225@end ifclear
7226
7227@node Nios II
7228@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7229@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7230@kindex --relax on Nios II
7231
7232Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7233transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7234which may result in @command{ld} giving
7235@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7236The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7237trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7238outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7239trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7240be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7241larger than 256MB.
7242
7243The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7244is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7245@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7246locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7247source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7248register as a temporary.
7249
7250Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7251relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7252option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7253
7254@ifclear GENERIC
7255@lowersections
7256@end ifclear
7257@end ifset
7258
2a60a7a8
AM
7259@ifset POWERPC
7260@ifclear GENERIC
7261@raisesections
7262@end ifclear
7263
7264@node PowerPC ELF32
7265@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7266@cindex PowerPC long branches
7267@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7268Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7269displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7270@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7271@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7272the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7273section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7274section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7275@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7276both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7277considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7278
7279@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7280@table @option
7281@cindex PowerPC PLT
7282@kindex --bss-plt
7283@item --bss-plt
7284Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7285generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7286the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7287writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7288@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7289PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7290compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7291BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7292
016687f8
AM
7293@kindex --secure-plt
7294@item --secure-plt
7295@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7296@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7297when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7298layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7299style BSS PLT.
7300
2a60a7a8
AM
7301@cindex PowerPC GOT
7302@kindex --sdata-got
7303@item --sdata-got
7304The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7305sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7306@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7307section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7308@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7309@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7310@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7311@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7312PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7313pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7314GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7315really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7316
7317@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7318@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7319@item --emit-stub-syms
7320This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7321symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7322
7323@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7324@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7325@item --no-tls-optimize
7326PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7327sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7328disable the optimization.
7329@end table
7330
7331@ifclear GENERIC
7332@lowersections
7333@end ifclear
7334@end ifset
7335
7336@ifset POWERPC64
7337@ifclear GENERIC
7338@raisesections
7339@end ifclear
7340
7341@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7342@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7343
7344@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7345@table @option
7346@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7347@kindex --stub-group-size
7348@item --stub-group-size
7349Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7350by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7351@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7352sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7353a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7354the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7355conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7356prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7357A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7358branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7359@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7360@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7361detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7362positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7363
7364Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7365single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7366create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7367large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7368
7369@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7370@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7371@item --emit-stub-syms
7372This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7373symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7374
7375@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7376@kindex --dotsyms
7377@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7378@item --dotsyms
7379@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7380These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7381in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7382function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7383code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7384properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7385to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7386@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7387dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7388feature.
7389
7ae4ea7d
AM
7390@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7391@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7392@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7393@item --save-restore-funcs
7394@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7395These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7396provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7397@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7398function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7399link.
7400
2a60a7a8
AM
7401@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7402@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7403@item --no-tls-optimize
7404PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7405sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7406disable the optimization.
7407
7c9cf415
AM
7408@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7409@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7410@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7411@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7412@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7413These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7414stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7415an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7416@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7417stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7418option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7419Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7420slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7421application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7422normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7423
2a60a7a8
AM
7424@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7425@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7426@item --no-opd-optimize
7427PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7428corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7429the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7430Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7431
7432@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7433@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7434@item --non-overlapping-opd
7435Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7436@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7437the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7438entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7439
7440@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7441@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7442@item --no-toc-optimize
7443PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7444entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7445reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7446marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7447marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7448relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7449unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7450reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7451discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7452reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7453code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7454optimization.
7455
7456@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7457@kindex --no-multi-toc
7458@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7459If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7460@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7461where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7462entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7463total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7464grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7465TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7466calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7467help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
746864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7469Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7470
7471@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7472@kindex --no-toc-sort
7473@item --no-toc-sort
7474By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7475happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7476placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7477with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7478referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7479@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7480results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7481off this feature.
7482
7483@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7484@kindex --plt-align
7485@kindex --no-plt-align
7486@item --plt-align
7487@itemx --no-plt-align
7488Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7489padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7490specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7491that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7492stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7493
7494@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7495@kindex --plt-static-chain
7496@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7497@item --plt-static-chain
7498@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7499Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7500chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7501chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7502
7503@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7504@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7505@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7506@item --plt-thread-safe
7507@itemx --no-thread-safe
7508With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7509lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7510another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7511order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7512memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7513barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7514looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7515seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7516default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7517@end table
7518
7519@ifclear GENERIC
7520@lowersections
7521@end ifclear
7522@end ifset
7523
49fa1e15
AM
7524@ifset SPU
7525@ifclear GENERIC
7526@raisesections
7527@end ifclear
7528
7529@node SPU ELF
7530@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7531
7532@cindex SPU ELF options
7533@table @option
7534
7535@cindex SPU plugins
7536@kindex --plugin
7537@item --plugin
7538This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7539
7540@cindex SPU overlays
7541@kindex --no-overlays
7542@item --no-overlays
7543Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7544regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7545@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7546turns off all this special overlay handling.
7547
7548@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7549@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7550@item --emit-stub-syms
7551This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7552symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7553
7554@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7555@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7556@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7557This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7558function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7559on calls to non-overlay regions.
7560
7561@cindex SPU local store size
7562@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7563@item --local-store=lo:hi
7564@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7565the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7566range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7567
c0065db7 7568@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7569@kindex --stack-analysis
7570@item --stack-analysis
7571SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7572unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7573under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7574@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7575@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7576determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7577for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7578for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7579for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7580find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7581and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7582under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7583dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7584is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7585and calls will be given.
7586
c0065db7 7587@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7588@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7589@item --emit-stack-syms
7590This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7591in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7592These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7593functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7594functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7595such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7596The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7597@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7598@end table
7599
7600@ifclear GENERIC
7601@lowersections
7602@end ifclear
7603@end ifset
7604
36f63dca
NC
7605@ifset TICOFF
7606@ifclear GENERIC
7607@raisesections
7608@end ifclear
7609
7610@node TI COFF
7611@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7612@cindex TI COFF versions
7613@kindex --format=@var{version}
7614The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7615TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7616also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7617format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7618header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7619
7620@ifclear GENERIC
7621@lowersections
7622@end ifclear
7623@end ifset
7624
2ca22b03
NC
7625@ifset WIN32
7626@ifclear GENERIC
7627@raisesections
7628@end ifclear
7629
7630@node WIN32
7631@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7632
c0065db7 7633This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7634See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7635command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7636
7637@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7638@cindex import libraries
7639@item import libraries
69da35b5 7640The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7641libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7642regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7643archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7644support for creating such libraries provided with the
7645@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7646
c0065db7
RM
7647@item exporting DLL symbols
7648@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7649The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7650
7651@table @emph
7652@item using auto-export functionality
7653@cindex using auto-export functionality
7654By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7655which is controlled by the following command line options:
7656
0a5d968e
NC
7657@itemize
7658@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7659@item --exclude-symbols
7660@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7661@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7662@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7663@end itemize
7664
09e2aba4
DK
7665When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7666(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7667symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7668often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7669private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7670options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7671exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7672final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7673
7674If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7675command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7676if either of the following are true:
7677
7678@itemize
7679@item A DEF file is used.
7680@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7681@end itemize
dc8465bf 7682
c0065db7
RM
7683@item using a DEF file
7684@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7685Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7686an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7687exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7688name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7689command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7690
7691@example
7692gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7693@end example
7694
0a5d968e
NC
7695Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7696@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7697
dc8465bf
NC
7698Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7699
7700@example
4b5bd4e7 7701LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7702
7703EXPORTS
7704foo
7705bar
7706_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7707another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7708var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7709doo = foo == foo2
7710eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7711@end example
dc8465bf 7712
7fcab871 7713This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7714symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7715alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7716by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7717@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7718@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7719export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7720in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7721symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7722
6b31ad16
DS
7723The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7724name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7725the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7726
b45619c0
NC
7727When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7728library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7729@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7730executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7731
7732With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7733specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7734non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7735
7736If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7737or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7738filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7739
4b5bd4e7
DS
7740The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7741
7742@example
7743EXPORTS
7744 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7745 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7746 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7747@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7748
7749Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7750@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7751@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7752@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7753Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7754@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7755string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7756
7757The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7758
7759@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7760will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7761by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7762linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7763library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7764
7765@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7766The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7767the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7768@code{*_imp__foo}).
7769
7770@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7771well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7772read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7773variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7774the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7775extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7776application will behave unexpectedly.
7777
7778@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7779it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7780symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7781API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7782the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7783
4b5bd4e7
DS
7784See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7785other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7786
7787@cindex creating a DEF file
7788While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7789with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7790
7791@item Using decorations
7792@cindex Using decorations
7793Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7794itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7795declared as:
7796
7797@example
7798__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7799__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7800@end example
7801
7802All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7803any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7804this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7805the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7806
7807Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7808decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7809instead:
7810
7811@example
7812__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7813__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7814@end example
7815
c0065db7
RM
7816This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7817when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7818variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7819code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7820of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7821omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7822@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7823information.
c0065db7 7824@end table
dc8465bf 7825
2ca22b03
NC
7826@cindex automatic data imports
7827@item automatic data imports
7828The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7829by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7830compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7831issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7832code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7833c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7834initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7835decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7836platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7837command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7838The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7839suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7840trigger the feature's use.
7841
c0065db7 7842auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7843additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7844
c0065db7 7845"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7846documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7847
c0065db7
RM
7848The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7849occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7850One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7851below.
7852
7853@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7854For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7855object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7856offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7857field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7858in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7859without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7860The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7861references.
7862
c0065db7
RM
7863The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7864be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7865themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7866runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7867compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7868support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7869run without error on an older system.
7870
c0065db7
RM
7871@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7872enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7873
7874@cindex direct linking to a dll
7875@item direct linking to a dll
7876The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7877including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7878libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7879traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7880libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7881function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7882though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7883storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7884tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7885large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7886
c0065db7 7887Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7888@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7889of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7890perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7891select the dll instead of an import library.
7892
2ca22b03 7893
69da35b5
NC
7894For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7895to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7896
7897@example
45e948fe
NC
7898libxxx.dll.a
7899xxx.dll.a
7900libxxx.a
7901xxx.lib
69da35b5 7902cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7903libxxx.dll
7904xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7905@end example
7906
69da35b5
NC
7907before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7908
c0065db7
RM
7909(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7910where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7911@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7912file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7913@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7914
c0065db7
RM
7915Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7916@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7917was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7918various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7919could coexist on the same machine.
7920
2ca22b03
NC
7921The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7922applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7923libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7924
7925@example
7926bin/
7927 cygxxx.dll
7928lib/
7929 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7930 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7931@end example
7932
c0065db7
RM
7933Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7934done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7935
79361. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7937@example
7938gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7939@end example
2ca22b03 7940
69da35b5
NC
7941However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7942(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7943@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7944not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7945
2ca22b03
NC
79462. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7947directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7948should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7949making the app/dll.
7950
7951@example
7952ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7953@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7954
7955Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7956
7957@example
7958gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7959@end example
69da35b5
NC
7960
7961This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7962perfectly legal
7963
7964@example
7965bin/
7966 cygxxx-5.dll
7967lib/
c0065db7 7968 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7969@end example
7970
dc8465bf 7971Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7972even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7973@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7974
7975Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7976wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7977
79781. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7979work with auto-imported data.
7980
dc8465bf
NC
79812. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7982import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7983symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7984for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7985possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7986
45e948fe
NC
79873. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7988critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7989in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7990stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7991
69da35b5 7992So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7993true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7994a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7995binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7996massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7997requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7998will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7999
c0065db7 8000@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8001@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8002@item adding additional names
8003Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8004A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8005exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8006when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8007import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8008
c0065db7 8009@example
dc8465bf
NC
8010LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8011
8012EXPORTS
c0065db7 8013foo
dc8465bf 8014_foo = foo
c0065db7 8015@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8016
8017The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8018
8019Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8020source code using the "weak" attribute:
8021
c0065db7
RM
8022@example
8023void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8024void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8025@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8026
8027See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8028symbols.
8029
8030@item renaming symbols
8031Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8032kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8033@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8034DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8035created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8036
c0065db7 8037@example
dc8465bf
NC
8038LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8039
8040EXPORTS
8041_foo = foo
c0065db7 8042@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8043
8044The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8045@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8046@end table
dc8465bf 8047
0a5d968e 8048Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8049unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8050If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8051@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8052that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8053@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8054renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8055to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8056the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8057In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8058which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8059
8060@cindex weak externals
8061@item weak externals
8062The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8063weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8064defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8065are three variants of weak externals:
8066@itemize
8067@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8068called lazy externals.
8069@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8070This form is not presently implemented.
8071@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8072implemented.
8073@end itemize
8074As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8075are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8076uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8077
8078@cindex aligned common symbols
8079@item aligned common symbols
8080As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8081desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8082the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8083carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8084by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8085tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8086but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8087warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8088
2ca22b03
NC
8089@end table
8090
8091@ifclear GENERIC
8092@lowersections
8093@end ifclear
8094@end ifset
8095
e0001a05
NC
8096@ifset XTENSA
8097@ifclear GENERIC
8098@raisesections
8099@end ifclear
8100
8101@node Xtensa
8102@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8103
8104@cindex Xtensa processors
8105The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8106@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8107specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8108keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8109example, with the command:
8110
8111@smallexample
8112SECTIONS
8113@{
8114 .text : @{
8115 *(.literal .text)
8116 @}
8117@}
8118@end smallexample
8119
8120@noindent
8121@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8122and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8123literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8124interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8125group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8126files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8127and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8128
43cd72b9 8129@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8130@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8131Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8132provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8133is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8134literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8135will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8136location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8137the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8138unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8139@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8140range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8141
8142For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8143to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8144instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8145instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8146instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8147@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8148hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8149By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8150switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8151density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8152instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8153performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8154linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8155a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8156
8157The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8158control the linker:
8159
8160@cindex Xtensa options
8161@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8162@item --size-opt
8163When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8164more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8165no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8166alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8167preserve the correctness of the code.
8168@end table
e0001a05
NC
8169
8170@ifclear GENERIC
8171@lowersections
8172@end ifclear
8173@end ifset
8174
252b5132
RH
8175@ifclear SingleFormat
8176@node BFD
8177@chapter BFD
8178
8179@cindex back end
8180@cindex object file management
8181@cindex object formats available
8182@kindex objdump -i
8183The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8184These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8185object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8186format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8187it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8188associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8189object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8190(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8191list all the formats available for your configuration.
8192
8193@cindex BFD requirements
8194@cindex requirements for BFD
8195As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8196several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8197BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8198formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8199been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8200BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8201may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8202
8203One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8204mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8205useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8206conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8207
8208@menu
8209* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8210@end menu
8211
8212@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8213@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8214@cindex opening object files
8215@include bfdsumm.texi
8216@end ifclear
8217
8218@node Reporting Bugs
8219@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8220@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8221@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8222
ff5dcc92 8223Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8224
8225Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8226it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8227to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8228work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8229@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8230
8231In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8232information that enables us to fix the bug.
8233
8234@menu
8235* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8236* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8237@end menu
8238
8239@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8240@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8241@cindex bug criteria
8242
8243If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8244
8245@itemize @bullet
8246@cindex fatal signal
8247@cindex linker crash
8248@cindex crash of linker
8249@item
8250If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8251@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8252
8253@cindex error on valid input
8254@item
ff5dcc92 8255If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8256
8257@cindex invalid input
8258@item
ff5dcc92 8259If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8260may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8261object files are correct.
8262
8263@item
8264If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8265improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8266@end itemize
8267
8268@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8269@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8270@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8271@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8272
8273A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8274products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8275recommend you contact that organization first.
8276
8277You can find contact information for many support companies and
8278individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8279distribution.
8280
ad22bfe8 8281@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8282Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8283@value{BUGURL}.
8284@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8285
8286The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8287@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8288fact or leave it out, state it!
8289
8290Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8291problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8292assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8293matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8294the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8295location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8296were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8297into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8298specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8299and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8300
8301Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8302the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8303on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8304
8305Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8306bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8307respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8308You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8309
8310To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8311
8312@itemize @bullet
8313@item
ff5dcc92 8314The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8315the @samp{--version} argument.
8316
8317Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8318the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8319
8320@item
ff5dcc92 8321Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8322patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8323
8324@item
8325The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8326version number.
8327
8328@item
ff5dcc92 8329What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8330``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8331
8332@item
8333The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8334observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8335list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8336sufficient.
8337
8338If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8339and then we might not encounter the bug.
8340
8341@item
8342A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8343bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8344provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8345bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8346state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8347requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8348we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8349attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8350
8351If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8352@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8353object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8354@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8355how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8356
8357@item
8358A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8359incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8360
ff5dcc92 8361Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8362will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8363not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8364a chance to make a mistake.
8365
8366Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8367say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8368copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8369C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8370and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8371fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8372you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8373any conclusion from our observations.
8374
8375@item
ff5dcc92 8376If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8377diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8378@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8379If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8380context, not by line number.
8381
8382The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8383sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8384@end itemize
8385
8386Here are some things that are not necessary:
8387
8388@itemize @bullet
8389@item
8390A description of the envelope of the bug.
8391
8392Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8393which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8394changes will not affect it.
8395
8396This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8397will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8398with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8399We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8400
8401Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8402of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8403output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8404less time, and so on.
8405
8406However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8407report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8408
8409@item
8410A patch for the bug.
8411
8412A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8413the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8414a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8415to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8416
ff5dcc92 8417Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8418construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8419through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8420able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8421fixed.
8422
8423And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8424patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8425help us to understand.
8426
8427@item
8428A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8429
8430Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8431things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8432@end itemize
8433
8434@node MRI
8435@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8436@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8437To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8438linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8439alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8440described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8441simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8442@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8443linker commands; these commands are described here.
8444
8445In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8446file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8447features to make use of them.
8448
8449You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8450@samp{-c} command-line option.
8451
8452Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8453command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8454blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8455MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8456issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8457
8458Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8459
8460You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8461lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8462The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8463
8464@table @code
8465@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8466@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8467@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8468Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8469the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8470@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8471your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8472script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8473commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8474input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8475@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8476
8477@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8478@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8479Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8480in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8481
8482@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8483
8484@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8485@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8486Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8487@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8488
8489@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8490@item BASE @var{expression}
8491Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8492absolute addresses) in the output file.
8493
8494@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8495@item CHIP @var{expression}
8496@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8497This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8498
8499@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8500@item END
8501This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8502
8503@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8504@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8505Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8506language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8507
8508@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8509@item
252b5132
RH
8510S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8511
8512@item
8513IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8514
8515@item
8516COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8517@samp{COFF}
8518@end enumerate
8519
8520@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8521@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8522Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8523@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8524
8525The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8526same line, with no change in its effect.
8527
8528@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8529@item LOAD @var{filename}
8530@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8531Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8532same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8533command line.
8534
8535@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8536@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8537@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8538MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8539option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8540
8541@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8542@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8543@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8544Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8545order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8546script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8547sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8548file, in the order specified.
8549
8550@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8551@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8552@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8553@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8554Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8555@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8556
8557@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8558@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8559@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8560@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8561You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8562specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8563If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8564@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8565@end table
8566
793c5807
NC
8567@node GNU Free Documentation License
8568@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8569@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8570
370b66a1
CD
8571@node LD Index
8572@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8573
8574@printindex cp
8575
8576@tex
7ca01ed9 8577% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8578% meantime:
8579\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8580\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8581\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8582\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8583\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8584\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8585\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8586\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8587\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8588% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8589@end tex
8590
252b5132 8591@bye
This page took 1.507855 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.